JP7110548B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray reservoir are discharged to the lower tray reservoir by being guided by the device (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-009055 A

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary that the game be played favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enables a game to be favorably played .

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides a shooting operation means operated to shoot a game ball,
Predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball;
a game value giving means for executing a process for giving a game value to a game;
a process executing means electrically connected to the game value imparting means for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising payout control means electrically connected to the game value imparting means and driving and controlling the payout means,
The game value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the processing for imparting the game value and is information to be referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means;
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference data stored in the first reference information storage means a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means;
a second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on ball entry information, which is information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detection means, to the process execution means;
means for waiting the progress of processing until a predetermined period of time elapses after a predetermined supply of power to the game machine is started;
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, after a predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined processing is started, the processing of erasing the information in the predetermined storage area is performed. means to carry out
with
The processing execution means is
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value imparting means;
execution means for executing the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage unit for storing processing result information, which is information about a processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution unit;
means for erasing the processing result information stored in the processing result information storage means when a prescribed erasing trigger occurs based on the execution of a prescribed erasing operation;
with
The reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means is not transmitted to the payout control means,
The payout control means is
grasping means for grasping the number of game balls to be put out based on the payout instruction signal transmitted from the game value adding means based on the result of the game;
means for driving and controlling said payout means so that the number of game balls grasped by said grasping means is paid out;
with
The game value imparting means is main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The processing execution means is a production control means for controlling the execution of production,
The predetermined process is a process corresponding to the state of the gaming machine and different from the payout of game balls ,
The first transmitting means transmits the reference information signal to the process executing means after the predetermined period has elapsed and after the erasing process is executed if the predetermined trigger has occurred. It is characterized in that it is configured to transmit .

According to the present invention, it is possible to favorably play a game .

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low certainty table for the first special figure, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high certainty table for the first special figure, (c) the It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low probability table for the second special figure, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability table for the second special figure. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the first special figure, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the second special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting a detection result of a ball-entering detection sensor to the main side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various devices which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by payout side CPU. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and signal types is stored in a correspondence memory. 9 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is the front view of the game board which expands and shows the area|region in which the special electric prize-winning device was provided. It is a perspective view of an opening-and-closing member. 8A and 8B are perspective views of a passage forming body and an opening/closing member showing how the opening/closing member opens/closes the inlet of the fourth discharge passage; It is a top view of an opening-and-closing member and a drive part for special electric trains. 30(a) and 30(b) are sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 29; FIG. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how a prize is awarded to the second opening in the opening/closing execution mode. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution aspect of opening-and-closing execution mode. (a1) ~ (b3) is a time chart for explaining the execution mode of the opening and closing execution mode that is executed triggered by the small winning result. It is a flow chart which shows the general figure general electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending|holding information performed by main side CPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process executed by the main side CPU. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure determination executed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing special electric open processing executed by the main side CPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric closing which is performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric end processing performed by main side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (h) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. FIG. 11 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by management side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the power failure handling process performed by management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger specific processing performed by main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by management side CPU. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing trigger identification processing executed by the main CPU in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing executed by a management-side CPU in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of an MPU of a main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main controller in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting detection results of each entering ball detection sensor to the main side CPU and management IC in the twelfth embodiment; (a1) to (c2) are time charts for explaining the manner of execution of the opening/closing execution mode in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing special electric open processing executed by the main side CPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special electric closing which is performed by main side CPU. It is a front view of the game board in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. (a) ~ (e) is a time chart showing how a game ball enters the first special ball entrance or the second special ball entrance in the opening and closing execution mode. FIG. 20 is a front view of a game board in the fifteenth embodiment; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA of FIG. 78. FIG. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 78; (b) is a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 78; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low certainty table for the first special figure, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high certainty table for the first special figure, (c) the It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low probability table for the second special figure, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability table for the second special figure. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution aspect of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the opening setting process for special electrics performed by main side CPU. FIG. 22 is a front view of a game board in the sixteenth embodiment; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the open setting process for special electrics performed by main side CPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the closed setting process for special electrics which is performed by main side CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how the first special electric prize winning device and the second special electric prize winning device are opened and closed. FIG. 20 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a game board for explaining the structure of a special electric winning device in a seventeenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the flow prevention control process performed by main side CPU. (a) ~ (d) is a time chart for explaining the relationship between the opening and closing state of each special electric winning device and the operating position of the flow blocking member. (a) ~ (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the opening and closing state of each special electric winning device and the operating position of the flow prevention member. It is a front view of the game board in the eighteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the holding|maintenance information by the side of a normal figure performed by main side CPU. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a pattern display apparatus. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how hold information on the general map side is acquired. It is a front view of a game board in the nineteenth embodiment. 95A and 95B are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 95;

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration inside the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, a solenoid 27c is driven and controlled to shoot a game ball.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and the others are provided one each.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 , one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out and sent to the special electric prize winning device 32 When one game ball is entered, 15 prize balls are paid out.

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The variable display unit 36 includes a pattern display device 41 having a rectangular display surface, and a center frame 36a surrounding the periphery of the display surface of the pattern display device 41 . In the center frame 36a, portions along the upper, left, and right sides of the display surface of the pattern display device 41 protrude forward from the board surface of the game board 24, and the variable display unit 36 is located in the central portion of the game area PA. is provided. Thus, the game area PA consists of an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located to the left of the variable display unit 36, and a right area PA3 located to the right of the variable display unit 36. , and a lower area PA4 located below the variable display unit . In other words, the game ball launched to the game area PA first reaches the upper area PA1, but the game ball that reaches the upper area PA1 is in the order of the upper area PA1 → left area PA2 → lower area PA4. Or, it flows down in the order of the upper area PA1→right area PA3→lower area PA4, and a game ball flowing down one of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 does not flow down the other.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in a lower area PA4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. The lower area PA4 is continuous with the left area PA2, which is the left area of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, and is the area to the right of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. It is continuous with the right side area PA3 and its downstream side. Therefore, the game ball flowing down from any position of the upper area PA1 which is the area above the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA can reach the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. . For example, the game ball can reach the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 even when the shooting operation device 28 is rotated so as to reach the maximum amount of operation. In addition, when the shooting operation is performed aiming at winning the first working opening 33, not only can the first working opening 33 win, but also the second working opening 34 can win. When a shooting operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the second working opening 34, not only can the winning in the second working opening 34 occur, but also the winning in the first working opening 33 can occur.

The first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are unitized as a working port device in a state in which the first working port 33 faces upward and the second working port 34 faces downward. there is The first operating port 33 is not provided with a member for differentiating the frequency of game balls entering the first operating port 33, and when comparing the left side area PA2 in a predetermined manner in which game balls flow down , the ball entry probability of the game ball into the first operating hole 33 is the same in any game state. Therefore, the player can perform a shooting operation aiming at entering the game ball into the first actuation opening 33 in any situation.

A stage portion 36c is provided in the lower frame portion 36b, which is a portion below the display surface of the pattern display device 41 in the center frame 36a, so as to extend in the horizontal direction above the first operation opening 33. In the left frame portion 36d of the variable display unit 36, which is the portion on the left side of the pattern display device 41, there is a warp path that makes it possible to guide game balls flowing down the area on the left side of the variable display unit 36 to the stage portion 36c. entrance portion 36e is formed. A center portion in the lateral direction of the stage portion 36c is present vertically above the first operating port 33, and a lead-out portion 36f for leading the game ball downward of the stage portion 36c by its own weight is provided in the center portion. is formed. In this case, the game ball drawn to the stage portion 36c and drawn downward from the stage portion 36c from a region other than the lead-out portion 36f is difficult to enter the first operating port 33, but the lead-out portion 36f A game ball drawn downward from the stage portion 36c enters the first operation opening 33 with a high probability.

The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the downstream direction of the game ball from the second operation port 34, more specifically in the right side area PA3. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail about the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with the 1st special figure display part 37a and the 2nd special figure display part 37b. In the first special figure display portion 37a, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning to the first operation opening 33 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display portion 37b, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning to the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but it is not limited to this. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and multiple types of characters , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display part 37c and a second special figure reservation display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The number of game balls winning the first operation port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first special figure reservation display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls winning the second operation opening 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33, the variation display of the pattern is performed according to it, and the second operation port When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the second special figure display part 37b based on the winning to 34, the variable display of the pattern is performed accordingly. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. will be

The display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display of the symbols will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. FIG. 4 is a view showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a view showing the display surface of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 4(a) to 4(j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped picture pattern. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, nine types of character patterns such as an octopus are assigned numbers '1' to '9' to form main patterns.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the display surface of the pattern display device 41 is provided with three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the medium symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main pattern of "4" is additionally arranged in , and one sub-pattern is arranged between each of these main patterns. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the display surface is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols. It has become. Also, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines are set on the display surface, ie, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5.

When the symbols are varied and displayed on the display surface based on the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts at . Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper pattern row Z1→lower pattern row Z3→middle pattern row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are displayed still in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display is finished. . In addition, when the fluctuation display of the symbols ends, if the result of the internal lottery is the 16R high probability result described later, a combination of "7" symbols is formed on any of the effective lines, and the result of the internal lottery is determined. If any of the 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R high probability result and 10R high probability result to be described later, the combination of the same odd number symbols other than "7" symbols on any of the activated lines If it is formed and the result of the internal lottery is any of the 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result to be described later, on any effective line A combination of the same even-numbered symbols is formed, and if the result of the internal lottery is one of the first small winning result, the second small winning result, and the third small winning result, which will be described later, it will be on any of the effective lines. A predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "3.4.1") is formed which is neither a combination of the same symbols nor a combination of ready-to-win symbols.

In addition, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started at any of the special figure display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41, and until the predetermined result is displayed and terminated corresponds to one game round. In addition, the pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner without being limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

When a jackpot win is won in a winning lottery based on the winning to the first operation port 33, the operation shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which a prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. Also, when a big win or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the second operation port 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 in the game area PA. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 cannot win the special electric prize winning device 32. When the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the PA3, the winning to the special electric winning device 32 becomes possible. The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32 will be described later in detail.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to ejection of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, a game ball entering any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowed into the game area PA is any of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a It will be discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball into. A game ball entering any one of the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a is led to the back side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are led to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they have flowed, and are led to the discharged ball recovery section (not shown). is recovered. The game balls collected by the discharged ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the discharge passages 42 to 48, respectively. These discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general prize winning openings 31 are provided as already explained, discharge passage portions 42 to 44 are provided corresponding to each of these four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general prize winning port 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. A second winning hole detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball entering the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage part 42, and enters the general winning hole 31 on the right side. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. FIG. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is formed so as to join the two general prize-winning ports 31 on the right side at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one exit side area by joining the entrance side areas in the middle. is doing. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 44 . A game ball entering one of the two right-side general winning holes 31 is detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44. - 特許庁

A fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 . A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball entering the special electric prize winning device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first operation port 33 . A first operation opening detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. It is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a while passing through. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34 . A second operation opening detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball entering the second operation opening 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. It is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a while it is passing through. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is present corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the out port 24a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

A game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 on the way down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to a main controller 60, which will be described later, and detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main controller 60. FIG. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when no game ball is detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed without being limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51 . A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge forward are vertically arranged below the window portion 51 . An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device 76, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) for main control of the game. The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. It should be noted that the substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the means for traces, there is a configuration of a connecting portion that inseparably connects a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box 60a and requires destruction of a predetermined portion upon separation, and an adhesive layer that remains on the adhesion target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box 60a is conceivable.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60.例文帳に追加The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism part 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling a payout device 76, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power supply/shooting control device 78 for controlling the launching of game balls is provided. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 . The MPU 62 incorporates a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the elements described above, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used exclusively for reading. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to retain data, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64 .

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the game ball entry mode in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main side CPU 63 . Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of ball entry into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is grasped according to the grasped ball entering history.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main controller 60 . A power supply/emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67 , and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67 .

The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to various sensors such as various incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. As already described, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor. 46a, a second operating opening detection sensor 47a, an outlet opening detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether a ball is entering each ball-entering section. Further, in the main CPU 63, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first operation port 33, and various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the second operation port 34.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77 and a sound emission control device 81. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on, for example, a game ball entering a prize ball corresponding ball entry portion corresponding to the payout of the game ball among the ball entry portions. be. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81 .

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes an opening/closing member 202, which will be described later, of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes a general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34. , a special figure unit 37 and a general figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display portion 37a, a second special figure display portion 37b, a first special figure reservation display portion 37c and a second special figure reservation display portion 37d. are all connected to the output side of the MPU 62 . Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the driving control of the special electric driving unit 32b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric accessory 34a is elected in the general electric open state, the main side CPU 63 performs drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. . Moreover, display control of the special figure display part 37a is performed in main side CPU63 in the case of each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is specified, the main side CPU 63 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 38a. Also, when the winning prize to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the special figure reservation display unit 37c in the main side CPU 63, When the display control of 37d is executed and winning to the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the normal pattern display unit 38a, the main side CPU 63 executes the display control of the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b. be done.

The blackout monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 78 and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 .

The power supply/emission control device 78 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, a game hall. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Electric power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60 . The power/shooting control device 78 is responsible for controlling the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and controls the display control device 82. is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81 .

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lottery Draws by Main Side CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display settings of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the display setting of the normal figure display portion 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of winning generation, the big winning type counter C2 used when determining the big winning type, and the symbol display device 41 Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when fluctuating out, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of hit random number counter C1, special figure display units 37a, 37b and fluctuation display in pattern display device 41 A variation type counter CS that determines the period is used. Furthermore, a general electric random number counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the general electric open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. It is stored in the special figure reservation area 65a. The special figure reservation area 65a includes a first special figure reservation area 85, a second special figure reservation area 86, and a special figure execution area 87.

The first special figure reservation area 85 comprises a first area 85a, a second area 85b, a third area 85c and a fourth area 85d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 85a to 85d as the reserved information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 85a to the fourth area 85d, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 85a→second area 85b→third area 85c→third area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the 4 areas 85d. By providing four areas 85a to 85d in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls into the first operating port 33 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. , may be singular.

The second special figure reservation area 86 comprises a first area 86a, a second area 86b, a third area 86c and a fourth area 86d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 86a to 86d as the reserved information on the special figure side. In this case, in the first area 86a to the fourth area 86d, when the winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 86a→second area 86b→third area 86c→third area Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the 4 area 86d. By providing four areas 86a to 86d in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the second operation opening 34 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. , may be singular.

The execution area 87 for the special figure stores reservation information of the target for the determination of whether or not the special figure is determined and the distribution determination when the variable display is started in one of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. area. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a, the reservation information stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure reservation area 85 moves to the special figure execution area 87 be done. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display portion 37b, the reservation information stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure reservation area 86 is moved to the special figure execution area 87.

Information corresponding to the general/universal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general/universal diagram reservation area 65c when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs. The general pattern reservation area 65c includes a first area 88a, a second area 88b, a third area 88c and a fourth area 88d. is stored in one of the areas 88a to 88d as reserved information on the general map side. In this case, in the first area 88a to the fourth area 88d, when winning to the through gate 35 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area 88a→second area 88b→third area 88c→fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of 88d. By providing four areas 88a to 88d in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the through gate 35 are reserved and stored. In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the normal drawing reservation area 65c is not limited to 4 and is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3 or 5 or more. may be The normal map reservation area 65c is provided with an execution area 89 for the normal map. The execution area 89 for the general pattern is an area in which reservation information for the target of the general electric open lottery process is stored when the variable display is started in the general pattern display section 38a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the reservation information stored in the first area 88a of the normal map reservation area 65c is moved to the execution area 89 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric random number counter C4 will be described. The general electric random number counter C4, for example, is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the general drawing reservation area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35.例文帳に追加Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electrical accessory 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electrical random number counter C4.

The pachinko machine 10 has only one support mode. Therefore, the probability of winning the general electric open state in the general electric open lottery process using the general electric random number counter C4 and the determination mode of the variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is executed in the general electric map display unit 38a It is constant regardless of the game state, the number of times the general electric role 34a is in the open state in the general electric open state, the open period of the general electric role 34a once, and the general electric role 34a in the general electric open state When the open state occurs multiple times, the execution mode of the drive control of the general electric accessory 34a, such as the closed period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state, is also constant regardless of the game state. is. As a result, there is no need to change the mode of display control of the general diagram display unit 38a and the mode of drive control of the general electrical accessory 34a according to the type of support mode, so the program capacity for executing these controls And it is possible to suppress the data capacity. In addition, since there is only one type of support mode, the normal game state in this embodiment is a game state in which the winning lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the high probability state in this embodiment is a winning lottery mode with a high probability. It is a game state that is a mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . Then, using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1, determination of winning or losing is performed.

The values of the random numbers that are selected for the win/loss determination are stored in the main ROM 64 as a win/fail table. In the hit/fail table, a big win result, a small win result, and a losing result are set as the win/fail results. The jackpot result is a winning/failing result that can serve as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open/close, as well as triggering a transition to the winning/failure lottery mode. The small hit result is a win/fail result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open/close, but does not trigger the transition to the win/fail lottery mode. The failure result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode and does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode.

The opening/closing execution mode executed when a jackpot result is obtained is a round number regulation mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. The round game continues until one of the following conditions is met: that the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed reaches the upper limit, or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric prize winning device 32. It's about gaming. In this embodiment, the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 is performed once in one round game, and the opening continuation period in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Also, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 is set to ten. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. is set to a time longer than the product of the shooting period of game balls and the upper limit number of winning prizes in one round game. Therefore, it can be expected that game balls equal to or more than the winning upper limit number of the special electric winning device 32 will win in each round game. Also, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode differs depending on the type of the jackpot result.

The opening and closing execution mode executed when a small hit result is obtained is that the round game is not set, the number of opening and closing times of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the upper limit number, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls This is the opening/closing number regulation mode that ends when one of the conditions for winning the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. A plurality of types of opening continuation periods are set for one opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing number regulation mode. These open continuation periods are all set longer than the game ball firing cycle (specifically 0.6 seconds), but the game ball firing cycle and the winning upper limit number (specifically 10) are set. There are a period of less than the product and a period of more than the product of the shooting cycle of the game ball and the winning upper limit number (specifically 10). In the opening/closing execution mode executed when a small win results, it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player, although the number is smaller than that in the opening/closing execution mode executed when a big win results.

As a success or failure table, as shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 9(a) to 9(d), the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 based on the winning of the first operation port 33 The first special figure used for the success or failure determination, and the second used for the second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 based on the winning to the second operation port 34 A success or failure table for special figures is set. Furthermore, the validity table for the first special figure includes a low probability table and a high probability table. There is a right or wrong table. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, different win/fail tables are referred to for the first hold information and the second hold information, and in either case, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are used as win/fail lottery modes in win/fail determination. Existing.

To explain each hit/fail table in detail, as shown in FIG. ”), and other values are random numbers that result in outliers. That is, if the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the success/failure determination is made for the first reservation information, it can be either a big hit result or a missing result, but it will not result in a small hit result.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), the high accuracy table for the first special figure has a larger number of random number values that result in a big hit than the low accuracy table for the first special figure. Specifically, there are 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305”). , 334, 365, 392, 420, 470, 495, 520, 558, 575, 599). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in the jackpot winning in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in the jackpot winning in the high probability mode. Other random number values are outlier random number values. That is, when the success/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the success/failure determination is made for the first reservation information, there is no small-hit result although the result is either a big-hit result or a losing result.

In the low probability table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 9(c), the value of the random number resulting in the big hit is the same as in the case of the low probability table for the first special figure. On the other hand, the values of random numbers other than the random numbers that result in the big win are the values of the random numbers that result in the small win. That is, if the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the success/failure determination process is performed for the second reservation information, it becomes either a big hit result or a small hit result. Further, a first small winning result, a second small winning result, and a third small winning result are set as small winning results. The first small winning result, the second small winning result, and the third small winning result differ in the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode, although the details will be described later. Further, the winning probabilities of these first to third small winning results are all the same at 199/600.

As shown in FIG. 9(d), the high probability table for the second special figure has the same random number value as the result of the big hit as the high probability table for the first special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values that result in the jackpot result is a larger number than in the case of the low certainty table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the values of random numbers other than the random numbers that result in the big win are the values of the random numbers that result in the small win. That is, when the success/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the success/failure determination is performed for the second reservation information, it becomes either a big hit result or a small hit result. As in the low certainty table for the second special figure, a first small winning result, a second small winning result, and a third small winning result are set as small winning results. Winning probabilities of these first to third small winning results are substantially the same at 193/600 or 194/600.

As described above, when the second hold information triggers the winning/failure determination, the small winning result can be generated, so that the winning to the second operation port 34 is generated to correspond to the small winning result. The open/close execution mode is more likely to occur. Then, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the result of the small hit is generated, so that the player can slightly increase the number of balls in his hand.

It should be noted that the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may be partially included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the high-probability mode, or may not be included. .

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the special figure reservation area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in two conditions, that is, the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode and the winning/failing lottery mode in the winning/failing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends. there is

As shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the distribution table contains 2R low-probability results, 2R high-probability results, 4R low-probability results, and 4R as types of jackpot results. A high probability result, a 6R low probability result, a 6R high probability result, a 10R low probability result, a 10R high probability result, a 16R low probability result, and a 16R high probability result are set.

The 2R low-probability result and the 2R high-probability result are two round game execution times in the opening and closing execution mode, and the 4R low-probability result and the 4R high-probability result are four round game execution times in the opening and closing execution mode, and 6R low probability. The 10R low probability result and the 10R high probability result are 10 round game execution times in the opening and closing execution mode, and the 16R low probability result. And the 16R high probability result is 16 executions of the round game in the open/close execution mode. In addition, the 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result are the winning lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and the winning lottery mode before switching to the opening and closing execution mode. In either case, the mode is low probability mode. This low-probability mode will continue at least until the next big win results, resulting in transition to the open/close execution mode. On the other hand, the 2R high-probability result, 4R high-probability result, 6R high-probability result, 10R high-probability result, and 16R high-probability result are obtained in the win-fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and in the win-fail lottery mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. In either case, the mode is high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until the next big win results, resulting in transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

As a distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), a first special function used for determining the distribution of the first pending information acquired based on the winning to the first operation port 33 A figure distribution table and a second special figure distribution table used for determining the distribution of the second reservation information acquired based on the winning to the second operation port 34 are set.

To explain each distribution table in detail, the distribution table for the first special figure is, as shown in FIG. Results, 4R low-probability results, 4R high-probability results, 6R low-probability results, 6R high-probability results, 10R low-probability results, 10R high-probability results, 16R low-probability results, and 16R high-probability results are set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, "0 to 1" corresponds to 2R low probability results, "2 to 5" corresponds to 2R high probability results, and "6 to 7" corresponds to 4R Corresponds to low probability results, "8 to 11" corresponds to 4R high probability results, "12 to 13" corresponds to 6R low probability results, and "14 to 17" corresponds to 6R high probability results. Corresponds to the result, "18-19" corresponds to 10R low probability result, "20-23" corresponds to 10R high probability result, "24-25" corresponds to 16R low probability result "26-29" corresponds to the 16R high probability result. In this case, the probability of 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result is about 6.7% respectively, 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, The probabilities of a 6R high probability result, a 10R high probability result and a 16R high probability result are each about 13%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the distribution table for the second special figure is set with 16R low-probability results and 16R high-probability results as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the distribution table for the second special figure, "0 to 9" correspond to the 16R low probability results, and "10 to 29" correspond to the 16R high probability results. In this case, the probability of 16R low probability result is about 33%, and this probability is 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and It is the same as the probability that one of the 16R low-probability results is selected. Also, the probability of a 16R high probability result is about 67%, and this probability is 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R high probability result and 16R in the distribution table for the first special figure It is the same as the probability that one of the high-probability results is selected.

The distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure have the same probability of entering the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the average number of executions of the round game is larger in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. Therefore, as a kind of jackpot result that can be selected when a jackpot is won, winning to the second operating port 34 occurs rather than winning to the first operating port 33 and internal lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player if an internal lottery is performed as a result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing a variable display of symbols, and the symbol display device 41 in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined big win result. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started in . Concretely, a combination of symbols with the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed with respect to the award correspondence result.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed by stopping and displaying the patterns of some of the plurality of pattern strings displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device 41, and the remaining patterns are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a row in a variable manner. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a ready-to-win effect. , the combination of the ready-to-win pattern is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform the ready-to-win effect.

In the advance notice display, after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all of the symbol rows, or in a part of the symbol rows and a plurality of patterns are displayed. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row. It also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern row in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Also, in the game round corresponding to the result of the small win, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 is executed when the reach display corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission control device 81 . In this case, the sound emission control device 81 determines that the game round corresponding to one of the jackpot results is more likely to generate the notice display than the game round corresponding to the result of losing, and that the notice display with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. Lottery processing for advance notice display is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being likely to occur. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 41 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main side CPU 63 determines the variation display period in the special figure display units 37 a and 37 b and the variation display period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 . The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated, and is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display units 37a and 37b and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main side CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and further whether or not the power failure flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Determine (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). step S107).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Further, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output process for outputting various data to a reading device connected to the MPU 62 Processing is executed (step S111). The details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when the main processing is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S112 is started. Therefore, the main side CPU 63 does not start the processing for advancing the game until this situation is reached.

After that, the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 is performed. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there will be a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S112 to S115 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S113, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S114, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S115, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, power failure information storage processing is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed and then an infinite loop is performed. Become. In the power failure process, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric random number counter C4, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

After that, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred. In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S209). In the ball-entering detection process, signals received from the ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the reading results, the out port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 , the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the ball-entering detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed (step S211). In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is shot at 0.6 sec which is a predetermined shooting cycle. In the following step S212, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a is checked, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is checked. I do.

After that, along with executing the special figure special electric control processing for controlling the execution of the game round and the execution control of the opening and closing execution mode (step S213), the display control of the general figure display unit 38a and the drive control of the general electric accessory 34a The general map general electric control processing for performing is executed (step S214). The processing contents of these special figure special electric control processing and general figure general electric control processing will be described in detail later.

In the subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of the last step S213 and step S214, the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information pertaining to the special figure display units 37a, 37b to the special figure pending display units 37c, 37d Along with performing the setting, output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information related to the general pattern display unit 38a to the general pattern reservation display unit 38b is set. Further, in step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the display of the normal figure display unit 38a Set the output information to update the contents.

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S216). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

<Entering ball detection processing>
Next, in the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a to the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

The main side CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle 8 types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing "0" or "1" information according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, the number of signals to be input to the input port 63a is limited to eight types by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the entering ball detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special train detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working opening detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working opening detection sensor 47a, and the The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a detects the passage of the game ball by outputting a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected. In this case, a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. When the input port 63a receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, stores "1" in the corresponding bit. store the information of In other words, in a situation in which the passage of the game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, "0" information corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is stored. In the detected state, "1" information corresponding to the information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the ball-entering detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). . The first output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a to the management IC 66. is a flag. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 10 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10-ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the first bit D1 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). . The second output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the second bit D2 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). . The third output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the third bit D3 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312), and further 1 is added to the value of the 15 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S313). The special electric prize-winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize-winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode. By confirming that the special electric prize flag is set to "1" in the special electric prize control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), the entry of one game ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 is confirmed. The generation of balls is specified, and 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining balls that can enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game or opening/closing execution mode. When the process of subtracting 1 from the possible number of hits is executed, the special electric winning prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times 15 game balls should be paid out. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 15 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316). Furthermore, 1 is added to the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33 . In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", the reservation area RE of the special figure reservation area 65a Under the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than the upper limit of four, processing for newly storing pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the first operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S213), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0" do. The fifth output flag is for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and a one prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state in which information "0" is stored to the state in which information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), and the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320). Furthermore, 1 is added to the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 . In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", the reservation area RE of the special figure reservation area 65a Under the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than the upper limit of four, processing for newly storing pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the second operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S213), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate win flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35 . By confirming that "1" is set to the gate winning prize flag in the general pattern general electric control processing (step S214) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), the general pattern stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c On the condition that the number of reserved information on the side is less than the upper limit number of 4, the numerical information of the current general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general map reservation area 65c as the reserved information on the general map side. do. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general/universal electric power control processing (step S214), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

In addition, since the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as already explained, when one game ball detection sensor 42a to 49a starts detecting one gaming ball, the entering ball In the situation where the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect the one game ball, the main side CPU 63 identifies that one game ball has been detected by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

<Configuration for paying out game balls>
Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices communicating with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The payout control device 77 has an MPU 91 . The MPU 91 incorporates a payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for memory retention, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92 .

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires external power supply for memory retention (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The payout-side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and takes a shorter time to read than the payout-side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93 .

The payout side CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main side CPU 63 . When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball can be paid out normally, and if it is specified that it is not possible to pay out the game ball normally, the payout side RAM 94 To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where unpaid prize ball number information is stored. In addition, the payout CPU 92 transmits to the main CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be performed normally. When the main side CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 inform that it is not possible to normally pay out the game balls. A notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 so that A state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, and a payout device 76 are states in which the game balls cannot be normally dispensed. does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the tank is full when the game balls are continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor, and the state in which the game balls are continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor is cancelled. It specifies that the full tank state is canceled when the tank is full.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout-side CPU 92 identifies the state of no ball when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is cancelled. Determine that the ballless state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout abnormal state occurs when the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor in spite of driving and controlling the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. , When the state in which the game balls are not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is specified that the abnormal payout state is canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. , the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The dispensing side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. Identify that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the dispensing side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to have changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door open command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door close command is received.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. Identify that the main body 12 is in the open state. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, the full-tank process is executed (step S401). In the full-tank processing, as already explained, based on the detection result of the full-tank detection sensor, it is specified whether or not the tank is full, and if the tank is full, processing for stopping the payout of game balls. is executed, and a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the full tank state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

After that, a ball useless process is executed (step S402). In the no-ball processing, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the no-ball state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor. While executing it, it transmits a command indicating that it is in the no-ball state to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state has been canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the abnormal payout monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the abnormal payout state is present based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the abnormal payout state exists, the process of stopping the payout of game balls is executed. At the same time, it transmits to the main side CPU 63 a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S404). In the front door open monitoring process, as already described, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95. If the front door frame 14 is open, A front door opening command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 while executing processing for stopping the payout of game balls. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

After that, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S405). In the main body open monitoring process, as already described, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, a game ball is detected. , and transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main side CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. - 特許庁Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the undistributed prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), game balls are paid out by the payout device 76 Payout control processing for controlling the execution of is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the drive control of the payout device 76 is performed, and one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. When it does, 1 is subtracted from the value of prize ball number information. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the driving control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S409).

<Configuration for external output to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97 . The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of which are A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92 . Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output

One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95 and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96 . More specifically, a signal relay board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92 . The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door open sensor 95 to the payout side CPU92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97 . As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open can be externally output to the hall computer HC without intervention of the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

More specifically, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 extending from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92 . The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the main body. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the body on the external terminal plate 97 . This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without intervention of the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the content of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 63 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). Information output from the main side CPU 63 to the external terminal plate 97 includes information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the winning/failure lottery mode is in the high probability mode, and information indicating that one game round has ended. Information indicating that and a predetermined number (for example, 100) game balls from the game area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

The payout side CPU 92 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). Information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal plate 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the manner in which game balls are put out in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97 . for example,
- Ball payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 - Ball payout in the normal game state other than the opening/closing execution mode and the high probability mode rate (hereinafter referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in open/close execution mode ・Ball output rate in high probability mode ・Number of game rounds executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (this ratio is hereinafter referred to as " S”)
・ BS x “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34”
・The number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
・The number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”)
・B-(S1דNumber of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33”+S2דNumber of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34”)
etc. are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry portion.

<Structure for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65 and a management IC 66. FIG. The MPU 62 also has an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from equipment outside the MPU 62 . The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63 via the internal bus 103 . Through the input port of the I/F 101, detection results from sensors such as the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, commands from the payout side CPU 92, etc. are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and command contents. Various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 as already described. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for a special electric as a result of execution of various processes by the main side CPU 63, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of execution of various processes by the CPU 63 , when command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 , the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101 .

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided on the surface of the MPU 62 so that the terminal portion for connection is exposed. . However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main controller 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect a reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a to expose the MPU 62. FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminals 102 . However, the invention is not limited to this, and an opening is formed in the substrate box 60a for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main controller 60. The configuration may be such that a reading device can be electrically connected to the terminal 102 .

The management IC 66 includes a management side I/F 111 , a management side CPU 112 , a management side ROM 113 , a management side RAM 114 , an RTC 115 , a correspondence memory 116 and a history memory 117 . These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be bidirectionally communicable.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main side CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the terminal 102 for reading. Various signals from the main side CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111 , and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111 . The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a signal path group 120 for two-way communication built in the MPU 62 .

The management-side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management-side CPU 112 . The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (ie, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside for storage, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter time required for reading than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113 .

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is capable of constantly measuring date information and time information and outputting the measured date information and time information according to instructions from the management side CPU 112 . In addition, the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, and is used for both reading and writing. Correspondence memory 116 stores information about correspondence between buffers 122a to 122p provided at input port 121 of management side I/F 111 and types of signals input to buffers 122a to 122p. used for The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require power supply from the outside (that is, a non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of game balls received from the main side CPU 63 through the management side I/F 111 . The details of the contents of history memory 117 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. As shown in FIG.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p. is LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and information of "1" is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at HI level. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. A first signal of HI level is output for a specific period when a ball is detected. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the second signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and one game is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a second signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the third signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a, and one game is detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a third signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal of HI level is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level fourth signal when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. to output a fourth signal of HI level over a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal of HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. When the ball is detected, a HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, and one game is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a. When the ball is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the sixth buffer 122f is receiving the HI level sixth signal.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the LOW level seventh signal when no new game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. HI level seventh signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth buffer 122h receives an eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in progress. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in the non-opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the opening/closing execution mode.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level ninth signal in the non-high-probability mode, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the high-probability mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues to output the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. and output.

An output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p to make the management side CPU 112 recognize the timing of outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102. FIG. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW-level output instruction signal when it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI-level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is being input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o can receive signals from the main side CPU 63, but normal signals cannot be input in the pachinko machine 10. It is blank. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p larger than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It becomes possible to divert the management IC 66 to a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66 . Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, it is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the signal paths 118k to 118o are not formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked may be employed.

It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, and the management side CPU 112 can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . Details of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described later. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies the types of the various signals in a state where operating power is being supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. As shown in FIG. Correspondence memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in one-to-one correspondence with first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided at input port 121 of management side I/F 111. is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is the general prize winning port 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 are displayed. Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, there is information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31. Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 are displayed. Stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information (15 pieces) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32. Stored. Information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (one ) are also stored. Information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that it is the second operating port 34 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (one ) are also stored. Information indicating the output port 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

Information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h by the management CPU 112. FIG. Information indicating the high-probability mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for specifying the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i by the management CPU 112. FIG. Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management CPU 112, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them is stored. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any kind of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them is stored. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that it is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any kind of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

As described above, the types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are specified by the management side CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. , the management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

In addition, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the type of the signal is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. It is a configuration that As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the signal is output each time. It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 .

Information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 is output at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management side CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Further, information setting for inputting the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. FIG. As a result, the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal to be reliably used not only in the pachinko machine 10 but also in other types of pachinko machines using the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the structure of the history memory 117. As shown in FIG.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set with serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set corresponding to each piece of pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing correspondence relationship information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10), First, date information and time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the current pointer information to be written. After that, the correspondence relation information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence relation memory 116, and the read correspondence relation information is stored in the area for storing the correspondence relation information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written.

Specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of ball entry corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect game balls entering the general winning hole 31. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is the general prize winning opening 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating the second operation port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the out port 24a. If the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball-entering part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the It is read from any one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of ball entering portion is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 as it is.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high probability mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high probability mode. A signal is input to indicate whether the door frame 14 is being opened. Therefore, the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, the information indicating the high probability mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area 123j is stored. , information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in a situation in the opening/closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. becomes possible. When the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information. When the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level ninth signal in the non-high-probability mode state, and continuously outputs the HI-level ninth signal in the high-probability mode state. The side CPU 112 specifies that the high-probability mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the high-probability mode has ended when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. becomes possible. When the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating the high-probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information. When the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating the high probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. When the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 . Further, when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 .

The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the 10 business days in which game balls are continuously shot from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It takes a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, the history information storage area 125 for 600,000 or more pieces is provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least ten days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124 . The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the pointer information currently being written in the history memory 117 . Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information designating the pointer information of "0" to be written. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the pointer information in the last order is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the use area 126 is updated. As a result, when the number of pieces of history information that can be stored exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, and a trigger for storing history information occurs, the history information storage area 125 in which the old pieces of history information are stored is overwritten with new pieces of history information in order. Become.

Also, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to "0" and the pointer information of "0" is written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that has been read once from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11).

First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognition output counter counts the remaining required number of times of information output for allowing the management side CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each of the buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for specifying by the main side CPU 63 . Since fifteen buffers 122a to 122o of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to signal type recognition as already described, "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, an identification start command output process is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to make the management CPU 112 recognize which kind of signals the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. The first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used for this command output. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management side CPU 112 recognize which kind of signal 122o corresponds to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. becomes possible and the configuration can be simplified. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification start command output processing, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Also, the period during which the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are corresponded so that the first buffer 122a is the target of signal type setting first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target of signal type setting after the nth buffer. Recognition setting of the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "15" to "13", the type identification command indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and the number of prize balls is read. read a type identification command indicating that it is the device 32 and the number of prize balls; if the output counter for recognition is "11", read out a type identification command indicating that it is the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls; If the output counter for recognition is "10", it is the second operating port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the output counter for recognition is "9", it is the out port 24a. If the output counter for recognition is "8", the type identification command indicating the open/close execution mode is read, and if the output counter for recognition is "7", the high probability mode is read. If the output counter for recognition is "6", the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is read. If the output counter for recognition is "5" to "1", it is blank. read out the type identification command indicating that there is

After that, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification type command output processing, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification type command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Also, the period during which the identification type command output state and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these identification type command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 fills the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the identification type command. Stores information about

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S505), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S506). When the value of the output counter for recognition is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the output counter for recognition after subtracting 1 is executed (steps S503 and step S504).

On the other hand, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "0" (step S506: YES), output processing of an identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification end command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification end command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period during which the identification end command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification end command, the management CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is performed. is started, the combination of the processes after step S606 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main side CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffers 122a to 122o for which the type of signal is to be set. The first buffer 122a is the target of signal type setting first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target of signal type setting after the nth buffer.

After that, on condition that the type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 stores the type identification received this time. Stores the signal type information set in the command. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S605).

When a negative determination is made in step S603, or when the process of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and under the condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. In step S607, a history setting process is executed for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, details of which will be described later. In step S608, although the details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

FIG. 23 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. FIG. 23(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is HI level, and FIG. FIG. 23D shows the timing of execution of the correspondence setting process (step S604) by the management side CPU 112. FIG.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the identification start command output using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 23(a). be. At the timing t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 23(b). After that, at timing t2 in which the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 23(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information of . In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management processing (FIG. 22) to enter the identification state. After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 23(a).

After that, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 23(a). At the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 23(b). After that, at timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 23(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 23(d). In the correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls is stored in the first correspondence area 123 a of the correspondence memory 116 . After that, at the timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 23(a).

After that, at timing t7 to timing t9, timing t10 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t15, and timing t16 to timing t18, similarly to timing t4 to timing t6, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed between timing t16 and timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 23(a), the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. At the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 23(b). After that, at timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 23(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 23(c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 23(a).

In order to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information by using the configuration that allows the management side CPU 112 to recognize whether or not a command is being output using the ninth signal as described above. Clearly to the management side CPU 112 that commands are being output even in a configuration in which commands are output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used. It is possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, "10" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The managed object counter specifies whether or not there is a managed object that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process, by the main CPU 63. In addition, it is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed for any of the managed objects. In one management output process, the management targets for which the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to change the signal output state to the management CPU 112 are the seven ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 10 items including whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether or not the high probability mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened/closed. Therefore, the managed counter is first set to "10".

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S702). If it is not HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed object counter is 4 or more, so that there are seven entering ball detection sensors 42a that are managed objects corresponding to the value of the managed object counter. to 48a (step S703).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", When the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is determined. is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "7". If it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operation opening detection sensor 46a , it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1". If the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " 1” is set. As already described, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S705). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to HI level (step S707). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred. It is determined whether or not the transition to the probability mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S708).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed to LOW level (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the managed object counter is 4 or more and the current managed object is any of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the managed object counter among the first to seventh signals It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed after switching the output state of the corresponding signal from LOW level to HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 22) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This period allows the management CPU 112 to reliably identify the state. If the value of the managed object counter is "3" and the current managed object is in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed object counter is "2". If the current managed object is the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode has ended. determines whether the front door frame 14 is closed. If there is an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to LOW level (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to LOW level ( step S710).

If a negative determination is made in step S704, if the process of step S706 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S707, if the process of step S708 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S709, or step When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S712). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the process after step S702 is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new value of the managed object counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 . Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, when the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the information indicating the high probability mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, the above writing is performed. Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the correspondence information is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence It becomes a target for reading information.

When the value of the check target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 by executing the writing process as described above , in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the combination of the relationship information indicating that it is either of the above is stored as history information. When the value of the check target counter is any of the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, RTC information and , the opening/closing execution mode, the high-probability mode, and the front door frame 14, and the combination of the start information is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S805). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S802, or when the process of step S805 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level is checked in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value. It is determined whether or not correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the current value of the confirmation target counter is "8" to "10", information indicating the open/close execution mode and the high probability mode are displayed in the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j. or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". It is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from HI level to LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808) as in step S803, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, not only the correspondence relationship information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation object counter is any of the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information to be written corresponds to the pointer information. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, and end information is stored as history information. state. After that, similar to step S805, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S810).

When a negative determination is made in step S806, when a negative determination is made in step S807, or when the process of step S810 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the check target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S812). When the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the process after step S802 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 26(a) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 26(b) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 26(c) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 26(d) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 26(e) shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117. FIG.

At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 26(a). Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 26(e). After that, at the timing of t2, the signal that was switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 26(a). However, since this signal is input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the LOW level switching is not stored in the history information, at the timing t2 in FIG. As shown in e), no history information is written.

After that, at timings t3, t5, t6, t9, t10, t13, and t14, the first to seventh buffers 122a, as shown in FIG. 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level. Accordingly, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 26(e).

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open/close execution mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(e), the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is switched to HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117 .

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into a hole is during the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high probability mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(e), the timing t8 at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. This makes it possible to grasp the execution period of the high-probability mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117 .

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that the ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the high probability mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into the ball is in the high-probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 26(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(e), the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Accordingly, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 indicates that the front door frame 14 is open. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into one is during the opening of the front door frame 14 .

Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to reading terminal 102 of MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 11).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 has been received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when it is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated. In this case, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 must be restarted in order to execute the data output process. Therefore, in order to output the history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since the power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the rear surface of the back pack unit 15, the outer frame 11 must be held in order to perform these stopping and starting operations. It is necessary to open the game machine main body 12 by pressing to expose the rear surface of the back pack unit 15.例文帳に追加Under these circumstances, in order to externally output the history information, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the manager of the game hall to read the history information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is determined by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102. (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to check both control information and history information, and if control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device will send the control information confirmation A signal is transmitted, and when the confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the reading device for checking the control information and the reading device for checking the history are separate may be employed. In this case, when a reading device for checking the control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for checking the control information is transmitted from the reading device, and the reading for history checking is sent to the reading terminal 102. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S902, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64 and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, the control information can be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and confirmation is made as to whether or not the control information is legitimate or normal. It is possible to do

When a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is being input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, management-side CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. The processing will be described later in detail.

When the process of step S903 or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it continues (step S905: YES), it waits in step S905. As a result, until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), the data output processing is terminated.

Next, the external output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 is switched from LOW level to HI level (step S1001: YES), the process for outputting the history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 is counted. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the special electric prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the winning ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 The number is calculated (step S1004). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1005). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out exit that occurred in the situation where the front door frame 14 was open 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1007). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information, which is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are not stored, the correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of entering balls calculated in step S1002 and the number of entering balls in the out port 24a calculated in step S1007 is defined as the number of entering balls K1, and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1007 is calculated in relation to the number of entering balls calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 is defined as the number of entered balls K2, the difference between the number of entered balls calculated in step S1004 and the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 is defined as the number of entered balls K3, The difference between the number of entering balls calculated in step S1007 and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1005 is defined as the number of entering balls K4, and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1006 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is defined as the number K5 of entering balls.
・ First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls discharged from the skill area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ratio (hereinafter referred to as this ratio "D1")
・Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls K2 entered into general winning hole 31/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Total number of entering balls K3 / ratio of total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) 4th parameter: Total number of entering balls K4 / discharged from the gaming area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D2")
· Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number K5 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K3 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x `` "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) After that, the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are used to extract all the history information that is the object of the calculation this time. Calculate the time (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . Also, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. FIG. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the first output process.

After that, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and the start information are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 that stores the end information, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 that occurred in the open/close execution mode , the number of balls entering each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S1011). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 stores the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, and the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 that stores start information and correspondence information indicating that the open/close execution mode is present, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is not stored. If the history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open/close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1011, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating holes 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in step S1007, except that the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1011 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1012 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls entering K11. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1012 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1011. 32 is defined as the number of hit balls K13, and the difference between the number of hit balls in the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1012 and the number of hit balls in the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of hit balls K13. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working opening 34 calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls entering the second working opening 34 calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entering balls K14.
11th parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "first operation opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11”)
12th parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K12 entering general winning port 31/total number of game balls discharged from game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) The ratio of the total number of entering balls K13 / the total number of gaming balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) Fourteenth parameter: the total number of entering balls K14 / discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D12")
· Fifteenth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 K15 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11-(D12 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operating port 33" + D13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the prize winning opening 31" + K13 x "The number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "The number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Second operation opening 34 18th parameter: K13 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x ``For winning to general winning port 31 "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) After that, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 .

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 stores the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information, and the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the history information storage area 125. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 that stores the end information, the out exit 24a and the general winning entrance 31 that occurred in the high probability mode , the number of balls entered into each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 (step S1015). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high-probability mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and the end information indicating the high-probability mode. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the high probability mode and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the high-probability mode is in place, the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 does not exist. If the history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information indicating the high-probability mode and the start information, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high-probability mode are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high probability mode.

After that, during the period of the high probability mode specified in step S1015, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating holes 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of hits is the same as in step S1007, except that the high-probability mode period specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1016 is defined as the number of balls entering K21. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1016 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1015. 32 is defined as the number of hit balls K23, and the difference between the number of hit balls in the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1016 and the number of hit balls in the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of hit balls K23. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working opening 34 calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entering the second working opening 34 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of entering balls K24.
21st parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "first operation opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11”)
22nd parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 K22 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) The ratio of the total number of game balls K23/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) 24th parameter: Total number of game balls K24/discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D22")
25th parameter: ratio of total number K25 of game balls entering second operation port 34/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23")
26th parameter: D21-(D22 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D23 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
After that, the third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . After that, clear processing is executed (step S1019). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

<Configuration of special electric prize winning device 32>
Next, the configuration of the special electric winning device 32 will be described. FIG. 29 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged area where the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided.

The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA as already described. The position where this special electric prize winning device 32 is provided is the middle position in the vertical direction in the right side area PA3. It extends laterally from a certain right frame portion 36g to the right end portion of the game area PA. Since the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided so as to extend in the lateral direction, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 surely passes through the area in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided.

The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201 in which an upstream region of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed, an opening/closing member 202 that prevents or permits entry of game balls into the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and an opening/closing member. and a guide member 203 that guides the movement of 202 . The passage forming body 201 is integrated with the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24.例文帳に追加An upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed in the passage formation member 201 so that an inlet portion 45b is present in the right wall portion 201a of the passage formation member 201 .

The entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is open toward the right, so that game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 can enter. The upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is inclined downward toward the left in the region continuing from the inlet portion 45b, but on the downstream side thereof, the game balls are drawn out to the back side of the game board 24. In addition, the passage direction is changed so as to guide the game ball to the lower side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加The exit portion of the upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists on the back side of the game board 24, and the downstream region 45d of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 provided on the back side of the game board 24 Connected to the inlet. A downstream region 45 d of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 extends vertically toward the lower side of the game board 24 . With the above configuration, the game ball entering the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is discharged below the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 . As already described, the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is provided with a special electric detection sensor 45a for detecting a game ball that has entered the fourth discharge passage portion 45 (that is, a game ball that has entered the special electric prize winning device 32). However, the special electric detection sensor 45a is installed in the passage forming body 201. As shown in FIG.

An opening/closing member 202 is provided to open/close the inlet portion 45 b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 . 30 is a perspective view of the opening/closing member 202, and FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the passage forming body 201 and the opening/closing member 202 showing how the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is opened and closed by the opening/closing member 202. FIG. 32 is a plan view of the opening/closing member 202 and the drive unit 32b for the special electric train.

The opening/closing member 202 is made of synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. and a blocking portion 212 vertically erected on one end side in the direction and formed integrally with the base portion 211 . An opening 213 is formed in the base portion 211 so as to vertically penetrate the base portion 211 . The opening 213 is formed in a laterally long rectangular shape, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the horizontal dimension of the opening 213 is set to be more than multiple times the diameter of the game ball, specifically set to be larger than five times the diameter of the game ball and smaller than six times the diameter of the game ball. It is Although the position where the opening 213 is formed is a position biased toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the base portion 211, it is halfway in both the front-rear direction and the lateral direction of the base portion 211. has a plate-like portion around the opening 213 .

A blocking portion 212 is formed in the base portion 211 so as to stand upward from the peripheral portion on the left side of the opening portion 213 . The blocking portion 212 is formed in a plate shape, and a pair of front and back plate surfaces face the horizontal direction. The area of the plate surface of the blocking portion 212 is, as shown in FIG. is set to a size that allows it to be completely closed.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the opening/closing member 202 is supported by the passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 so as to be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the guide member 203 is provided so as to extend laterally from the right end portion of the game area PA to the front of the passage forming body 201 . The passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 are provided with a slide through-hole 221 that penetrates the game board 24 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 . The slide through hole 221 is formed to be one size larger than the outer edge portion of the opening/closing member 202 when viewed from the front. The opening/closing member 202 is inserted into the slide through-hole 221 , and the opening/closing member 202 can slide in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the slide through-hole 221 .

When inserted into the slide through-hole 221, the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202 is positioned close to the plate surface on the right side of the right wall portion 201a of the passage forming body 201 where the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed. will be confronted with. The distance between the plate surface on the right side of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 is set to be less than the radius of the game ball. Further, the right plate surface of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 are in contact with each other, and when the opening/closing member 202 moves, the blocking portion 212 moves the right wall portion 201a. It is good also as a structure which slides on the plate|board surface top of a right side.

The opening/closing member 202 has a closed position where the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 as shown in FIG. The blocking part 212 is moved to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the entrance part 45b of 45, and the entrance part 45b can be moved to an open position opened rightward. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a drive unit 32b for a special electric is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the opening/closing member 202 for sliding the opening/closing member 202 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The special electric drive unit 32b is a solenoid that is an electric actuator. In a non-driving state in which no drive signal is output from the main CPU 63 to the drive section 32b for special electric, the output section 226 of the drive section 32b for special electric is operated by the biasing force of the biasing member 225 of the drive section 32b for special electric. is placed at the protruding position. On the other hand, in the drive state in which the drive signal is output from the main CPU 63 to the drive unit 32b for the special electric, the output unit 226 is given a pulling force toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. moves to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 against the biasing force of the biasing member 225 and is arranged at the retracted position. The tip of the output portion 226 is connected to the rear end portion of the opening/closing member 202 . Therefore, when the special electric drive unit 32b is in a non-driving state and the output unit 226 is arranged at the projecting position, the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position as shown in FIG. When the driving portion 32b is in the driving state and the output portion 226 is at the retracted position, the opening/closing member 202 is at the open position as shown in FIG. 31(b). In addition, since the main body 227 of the special electric drive unit 32b is located on the back side of the game board 24 and the output unit 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening/closing member 202, the special electric power can be received from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The driving portion 32b for the 1 is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized.

In addition to FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), FIGS. ) will be described. 33(a) and 33(b) are sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 29. FIG. 31(a) and 33(a) show the state in which the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, and FIGS. 31(b) and 33(b) show the state in which the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position. indicates that the First, the case where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position will be described.

When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 33(a). . As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, entry of the game ball into the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is blocked.

The opening 213 of the base portion 211 exists on the right side of the blocking portion 212 as already described regardless of whether the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position. In addition, the guide plate portion 214, which is the area on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the opening portion 213 in the base portion 211, has a front tip portion that extends through the window of the front door frame 14 when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position. It faces the panel 52 at a position close to it. The distance between the tip of the guide plate portion 214 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, even if a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 tries to flow downward from the front end portion of the guide plate portion 214, it will not be possible. It is blocked by the window panel 52 .

In the state where the open/close member 202 is arranged at the closed position, the left end portion of the guide plate portion 214 extends in the front-rear direction at a position below the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 in the passage forming member 201. It enters into the formed slide through-hole 221 . In this case, the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 slopes down toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 and also slopes down toward the left. In this configuration, the passage forming body 201 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24, and the front end of the passage forming body 201 faces the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 at a position close to it. there is The distance between the front end of the passage forming body 201 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, even if a game ball tries to move from the left end of the guide plate portion 214 to the left of the guide plate portion 214, it is blocked by the passage forming body 201. be. The upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is not only inclined downward toward the left as already explained, but also inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, so that the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position. The game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 moves toward the opening portion 213 due to its own weight and flows into the opening portion 213. As shown in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the guide member 203 is provided so as to protrude forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24, and the forward protruding portion is arranged at the closed position. It faces from above the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 . A left region 232 of this forwardly projecting portion, excluding the receiving portion 231 on the right end side, extends laterally along the opening 213 of the base portion 211 when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position. However, the amount of protrusion of the left side region 232 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is such that the opening 213 of the base portion 211 is not included in the facing range. This prevents the opening 213 from being blocked by the guide member 203 when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position. In addition, since the longitudinal dimension of the left area 232 is less than the radius of the game ball, the game ball does not ride on the left area 232 .

On the other hand, the receiving portion 231 located on the right side of the opening portion 213 of the opening/closing member 202 in the guide member 203 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the left side region 232, and the forward end thereof is the front door frame 14. The window panel 52 and the window panel 52 are opposed to each other at a position close to each other. The distance between the tip of the receiving portion 231 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, even if the game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 tries to flow down from the front tip portion of the receiving portion 231, it is blocked by the window panel 52. - 特許庁In addition, since the receiving portion 231 exists at the right end portion of the game board 24, even if the game ball placed on the receiving portion 231 tries to flow downward from the right end portion of the receiving portion 231, the resin base 21 At , it is blocked by a portion provided on the right side of the game board 24 .

The upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is set so that both the longitudinal dimension and the lateral dimension are larger than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the front region 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is present on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 arranged at the closed position. At the left edge of the front area 233, a regulation part 234 is provided to prevent the game ball placed on the front area 233 from falling from the left edge of the front area 233 to the left of the front area 233. integrally formed. In addition, the front area 233 slopes downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, the game ball placed on the front region 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves to the rear region 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 by its own weight. The rear region 235 slopes down toward the left, and there is no part that prevents the game ball from flowing down from the left end of the rear region 235 to the left of the rear region 235 . Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, the game ball placed on the rear region 235 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 moves toward the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 by its own weight and moves toward the opening. 213.

Next, a case where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position will be described. When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202 as shown in FIGS. 31(b) and 33(b). It is open to the right without being closed. This allows the game ball to enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 .

When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the entire opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the slide through hole 221, and the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is arranged. The guide plate portion 214 of the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 is present on the right side of the . In this case, as shown in FIG. 33B, the guide plate portion 214 extends laterally between the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and the rear region 235 of the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. will be extended to Since the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is inclined downward toward the left end of the rear region 235 as already described, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is directed toward the guide plate portion 214 by its own weight. Since the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is downwardly inclined toward the left, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is pushed by its own weight to the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45. will move towards That is, in the state where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 or the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is pushed towards the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 by its own weight. The ball moves and enters the entrance portion 45b. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, not only is it possible to enter the game ball into the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, but also the entrance of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 The opening/closing member 202 guides the entry of the game ball into the portion 45b.

When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the opening/closing member 202 moves to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 more than when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position. and the window panel 52 is increased. Then, this distance becomes a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, depending on the downward direction and momentum of the game ball that has flowed down toward the special electric prize winning device 32 in the right area PA3, the game ball enters the space between the guide plate portion 214 and the window panel 52, causing the space to pass. The game ball may flow down below the special electric prize winning device 32 by flowing down. That is, even when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the game ball that reaches the position of the special electric prize winning device 32 does not win the special electric prize winning device 32 and flows down below the special electric prize winning device 32. anything can happen. However, it is not limited to this, and by integrally forming a projecting portion projecting upward over the entire front end portion of the guide plate portion 214, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 is moved to the guide plate. A configuration may be adopted in which the front end portion of the portion 214 does not fall or is difficult to fall downward.

Next, referring to FIG. 29 again, the configuration for setting the flow-down mode of game balls in the right area PA3 to a predetermined mode will be described.

On the upstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the right side area PA3, the game ball flowing down the upstream side of the right side area PA3 is placed on the right end side of the special electric prize winning device 32, more specifically, the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 and its Guiding means are provided for guiding to the surroundings. A guiding nail group 241 consisting of a plurality of nails 24b is provided as the guiding means. In the guide nail group 241, a plurality of nails 24b are arranged downward to the right so as to create a guide portion that slopes downward from the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203. is formed by In this case, the distance between the left end nail 24b and the right frame portion 36g in the guide nail group 241 is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, and the distance between the adjacent nails 24b in the guide nail group 241 is also set. It is set to be less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the guide nail group 241 is guided toward the receiving part 231 of the guide member 203 by the guide part of the guide nail group 241 .

The game ball guided to the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is guided to the opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 by the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position, as already described. and flows into the opening 213 . Therefore, in a situation where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area PA3 and reached the special electric winning device 32 flows into the area near the receiving portion 231 in the opening portion 213 of the base portion 211. It will flow down toward the lower part of the special electric prize winning device 32.

Here, as already explained, the through gate 35 is provided in the right area PA3, and the through gate 35 is arranged downstream of the special electric prize winning device 32 and closer to the passage formation body 201 of the special electric prize winning device 32. . In addition, between the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35, only the game ball that has flowed downward from the special electric prize winning device 32 near the passage forming body 201 can enter the through gate 35. A regulating nail group 242 is provided to ensure that the As a result, the game ball that has reached the special electric winning device 32 is prevented from passing through the through gate 35 while the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the game ball that has reached the special electric prize winning device 32 travels on the guiding plate portion 214 of the base portion 211 to the entrance portion of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 as already described. It will flow down toward 45b. In this case, if the opening and closing member 202 is kept in the open position until the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 reaches the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, the game ball is The ball enters the entrance portion 45b. On the other hand, if the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position before reaching the entrance portion 45b, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 at that time is After moving to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 following the movement of the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is guided to the opening 213 of the base portion 211 along the inclination of the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 and flows into the opening portion 213. Become. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball exists in the predetermined range X near the passage forming body 201 on the guiding plate portion 214, the game ball moves to the passage forming body. At a position close to 201 , it flows down toward the special electric prize winning device 32 and passes through the through gate 35 . Then, by passing the game ball through the through gate 35, the reservation information on the general diagram side is acquired, and the opportunity to open the general electrical role 34a of the second operation port 34 is generated. In other words, the opportunity to enter the through gate 35, that is, the opportunity to open the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 occurs only in the opening/closing execution mode.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 34, how the winning to the second opening 34 occurs in the open/close execution mode will be described. FIG. 34(a) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, FIG. 34(b) shows the opening/closing state of the special electric prize winning device 32, and FIG. FIG. 34(d) shows the execution period of the open state of the second working port 34, and FIG. 34(e) shows the timing when winning to the second working port 34 occurs. In addition, when the electric power is opened, the open state of the second operating port 34 occurs multiple times, but in FIG. 34, for convenience of explanation, the open state of the second operating port 34 occurs only once. described as.

At the timing t1, the opening/closing execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 34(a). In the open/close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 34(b), a round game is executed in each period of timing t2 to timing t3, timing t7 to timing t9, timing t13 to timing t15, etc., and a special electric prize is won. Device 32 is now open.

Among these round games, in each of the round game from timing t2 to timing t3 and the round game from timing t7 to timing t9, the special electric prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state at t3 timing and t9 timing In each case, a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 . Then, at the timing of t3 and the timing of t9, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position and the special electric prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state, it is placed on the guide plate portion 214. The game ball falls into the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 . The dropped game ball enters the through gate 35 at timing t4 and timing t10, respectively, as shown in FIG. 34(c). As a result, the reserved information on the general pattern side is acquired, and the variable display of the pattern is started in the general pattern display section 38a. Then, when the variable display of the pattern ends, as shown in FIG. The accessory 34a is in an open state. As already explained, even a game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can reach the position where the second operation opening 34 is provided, so that the game ball is directed to the right side area PA3 to make the special electric winning device 32 win the game ball By continuing the shooting of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 34(e), winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs at the timing of t6 and the timing of t12, respectively. Thereby, the second hold information is acquired. Since the start of a new game cycle is blocked during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the execution of the validity determination processing for the acquired second reservation information and the start of the game cycle triggered by the second reservation information are This is done after the current opening and closing execution mode is finished.

On the other hand, in the round game from the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, at the timing of t15 when the special electric prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state, the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32. Or, even if a game ball is placed on the guide plate part 214, the game ball does not fall to a position where the ball can enter the through gate 35. - 特許庁Therefore, winning to the through gate 35 does not occur for the end of the round game.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34(a), the opening/closing execution mode occurs at the timing of t16. At the timing when the opening/closing execution mode is completed, the reservation information on the normal drawing side is retained and stored in the normal drawing retaining area 65c. As a result, as shown in FIG. 34(d), the opening of the second operating port 34 is started at the timing t17 after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and this opening period continues until the timing t19. Then, during this period, the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 or the right side area PA3, and as shown in FIG. Occur. In this case, when the second reservation information for the upper limit number is not reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 at this point, the second reservation information is newly acquired. Then, the second reservation information becomes an execution target of the success/failure determination process and serves as a trigger for starting a new game cycle.

<Mode of execution of open/close execution mode>
Next, the manner of execution of the opening/closing execution mode will be described. FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

As already explained in this embodiment, as a jackpot result, 2R low probability result, 2R high probability result, 4R low probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R low probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R low probability result, 10R high probability As a result, there are 16R low probability results and 16R high probability results. As shown in FIG. 35(a), the interval period between each round game is set to 3 seconds in each of the opening and closing execution modes that occur when a big hit results. In addition, in each of these open/close execution modes, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is set to 10, and the opening duration of each round game is set to 29 seconds. In each round game, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed once.

On the other hand, the number of round games generated in these open/close execution modes is different. Specifically, in the 2R low probability result and 2R high probability result, the number of round games is set to 2 times, and in the 4R low probability result and 4R high probability result, the number of round games is set to 4 times. , 6R low probability result and 6R high probability result, the number of round games is set to 6 times, 10R low probability result and 10R high probability result, the number of round games is set to 10 times, 16R low probability In the result and the 16R high probability result, the number of round games is set to 16 times. Since the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in one opening/closing execution mode increases as the number of round game executions increases, the jackpot result with a large number of round game executions is more advantageous to the player.

Further, the number of times the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 slides between the open position and the closed position increases as the number of round games executed increases. As already explained, the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can enter the through gate 35 at the timing when the opening/closing member 202 slides from the open position to the closed position. Therefore, the greater the number of times the opening/closing member 202 slides between the open position and the closed position, the more frequently the winning through the through gate 35 occurs. A trigger is generated in which the general electrical accessory 34a of the operation port 34 is in an open state. Then, when the second reservation information acquired by the occurrence of the winning to the second operation port 34 becomes the execution target of the success/failure determination process, since either the big hit result or the small hit result occurs, An open/close execution mode is generated. From this point of view as well, it is advantageous for the player to win big wins with a large number of round games.

A low-probability result and a high-probability result are set as jackpot results in which the number of executions of the round game is the same. That is, the 2R low-probability result and the 2R high-probability result are set as the jackpot results in which the round game is executed twice. In addition, a 4R low-probability result and a 4R high-probability result are set as the jackpot results in which the round game is executed four times. In addition, a 6R low probability result and a 6R high probability result are set as the jackpot result of executing the round game six times. In addition, 10R low-probability results and 10R high-probability results are set as jackpot results in which the round game is executed 10 times. Also, a 16R low-probability result and a 16R high-probability result are set as the jackpot results for which the round game is executed 16 times. As a result, as a jackpot result in which the number of round games that occur in the opening and closing execution mode is the same, the success or failure lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode is a low probability mode, and the success or failure lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode is high. There will be highly probable results and probabilistic modes. Therefore, with respect to the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, there are jackpot results in which the winning/failure lottery mode setting mode is different while the player's degree of profit is the same. More types of targets.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, there are a first small winning result, a second small winning result and a third small winning result as small winning results. As shown in FIG. 35(b), the upper limit number of winning prizes is set to 10 in any of the opening/closing execution modes that occur when a small win results. On the other hand, the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened in the opening/closing execution mode and the opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 in each opening time are different for each small winning result.

FIG. 36 is a time chart for explaining the mode of execution of the opening/closing execution mode which is executed when a small winning result is obtained. FIGS. 36(a1), 36(a2) and 36(a3) show the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, and FIGS. 36(b1), 36(b2) and 36(b3) are Indicates the period of time in the open state. Also, FIGS. 36(a1) and 36(b1) show the execution mode of the opening and closing execution mode executed when the result of the first small hit is reached, and FIGS. 36(a2) and 36(b2) show 36(a3) and 36(b3) show the execution mode of the opening and closing execution mode executed with the second small winning result as a trigger, and FIGS. 36(a3) and 36(b3) are executed with the third small winning result as a trigger. 3 shows an execution mode of the opening and closing execution mode.

In the case of the first small hit result, when the opening and closing execution mode is executed over the timing of t1 to the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 36 (a1), the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened only once over the timing of t3. The opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in one opening time is set to 10 seconds as shown in FIG. 35(b). The firing cycle of game balls is 0.6 seconds, and the maximum number of winning prizes for game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is 10. Therefore, this open duration period is the firing cycle of game balls and the winning upper limit. It becomes a longer period than the product with the number.

In the case of the second small hit result, when the opening and closing execution mode is executed over the timing of t1 to the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 36 (a2), the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once over each of the timing of t11, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, and the timing of t18 to t19. . In other words, in the case of the second small winning result, the number of openings of the special electric prize winning device 32 is five. The opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in each opening time is set to 2 seconds as shown in FIG. 35(b). The firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit number of winning game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode is 10, so the opening duration of each opening time is the firing cycle of the game ball The period is shorter than the product of and the maximum number of winning prizes. However, the total opening continuation period of each opening time is longer than the product of the shooting period of the game ball and the winning upper limit number. Further, the total opening duration of each opening is equal to the opening duration of one opening in the opening/closing execution mode in the first small winning result.

In the case of the third small hit result, when the opening and closing execution mode is executed over the timing of t1 to the timing of t40 as shown in FIG. 36 (a3), the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. Timing t21, timing t22-timing t23, timing t24-timing t25, timing t26-timing t27, timing t28-timing t29, timing t30-timing t31, timing t32-t33 The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once over the timing, timing t34 to timing t35, timing t36 to timing t37, and timing t38 to timing t39. That is, in the case of the third small winning result, the number of openings of the special electric prize winning device 32 is 10 times. The opening continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 in each opening time is set to 1 second as shown in FIG. 35(b). The firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit number of winning game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode is 10, so the opening duration of each opening time is the firing cycle of the game ball The period is shorter than the product of and the maximum number of winning prizes. However, the total opening continuation period of each opening time is longer than the product of the shooting period of the game ball and the winning upper limit number. In addition, the total opening continuation period of each opening time is equal to the opening continuation period of one opening time in the opening and closing execution mode in the first small winning result, and the total opening continuation time of each opening time in the second small winning result Equal to period.

As described above, in the open/close execution mode of each small hit result, the smaller the number of times of opening, the longer the opening duration of each opening is set. The longer the duration of one opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 is, the easier it is for the special electric prize winning device 32 to win a prize. On the other hand, the greater the number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened, the more chances that the special electric prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state while the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202. As a result, the winning of the through gate 35 is likely to occur. Therefore, in the result of the first small win, winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 is most likely to occur, but winning to the through gate 35 is the least likely, and in the result of the third small prize, winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs most. Although it is difficult, winning to the through gate 35 is most likely to occur, and in the second small winning result, both winning to the special electric winning device 32 and winning to the through gate 35 are moderately likely to occur. As a result, the player who expects the special electric prize winning device 32 to expect the first small win result, and the player who expects the through gate 35 to win the third small win result. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that the player expects. In addition, even if any of the first small winning result, the second small winning result, and the third small winning result occurs, there is merit in each, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to each small winning result. Become.

In both cases of the second small winning result and the third small winning result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times, but the interval period of each opening time is the same at 3 seconds. there is In addition, the game ball can reach the predetermined range X on the guide plate portion 214 when the opening/closing member 202 is placed at the open position for one second.

<Public power control processing>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the second operation port 34 between the open state and the closed state and a processing configuration for switching the special electric winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. First, a processing configuration for switching the second operating port 34 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the normal/universal power control process executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. In addition, normal figure normal electric control processing is performed in step S214 of timer interruption processing (FIG. 12).

First, an acquisition process of holding information on the general map side is executed (step S1101). In the acquisition process, if the winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, and the general pattern reservation area 65c is not in a situation where the upper limit number of general pattern side reservation information is acquired, the general electric random number counter C4 Numerical information is stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c. In this case, the reservation information on the normal map side is stored in the order of the first area 88a→second area 88b→third area 88c→fourth area 88d.

After that, while reading the numerical information of the general/universal electric counter provided in the main side RAM65 (step S1102), the general/universal electric address table provided in the main side ROM64 is read (step S1103). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the counter for the general electric power is acquired from the general electric power table (step S1104), and the process indicated by the acquired start address is jumped to (step S1105).

The general pattern general electric counter is a counter for grasping by the main side CPU 63 which of the processes of steps S1106 to S1110 in the general pattern general electric control process should be executed, and the general general electric In the address table, the start address in the program for executing each process of steps S1106 to S1110 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general/universal electric counter. If the value of the normal figure normal electric counter is "0", jump to the normal figure fluctuation start process of step S1106, and if the value of the general figure general electric counter is "1", the normal figure fluctuation of step S1107 Jump to intermediate processing, if the value of the general map general electric counter is "2", jump to the general map determination in process of step S1108, if the value of the general general electric counter is "3" It jumps to processing during normal electric opening of step S1109, and jumps to processing during normal electric closing of step S1110 when the value of the general electric power counter is "4".

In the general pattern fluctuation start process of step S1106, on the condition that the reservation information of the general pattern side is reserved and stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c, the reservation information of the general pattern side that is reserved and stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c , perform the process of shifting the Specifically, the reservation information on the side of the general pattern stored in the first area 88a of the general pattern reservation area 65c is shifted to the execution area 89 for the general pattern, and then the second area 88b → the first area 88a, The reservation information on the normal map side is shifted so that the third area 88c→the second area 88b and the fourth area 88d→the third area 88c. Then, the general electric open lottery process is executed with the holding information on the general public side newly shifted to the execution area 89 for the general public drawing as the lottery value. In this embodiment, as already explained, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the probability of winning the general electric open state in the general electric open lottery process is constant regardless of the game state such as whether the open/close execution mode is in progress and whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, the power supply open state is won with a probability of 9/10.

However, it is not limited to this, and the probability of being elected in the open state may be higher or lower than this. Moreover, instead of executing the general electric open lottery process, the general electric open state may be reliably generated once with respect to the reservation information on the general electric map side. In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the normal voltage open state.

In the general pattern fluctuation start process, when the general electric open lottery process is executed, the process of starting the fluctuation display of the pattern in the general pattern display unit 38a is executed. In this case, the information of the variable display period for variably displaying the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is set in the normal map normal electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM65. The value set in the normal/universal electric timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed. In this embodiment, as already explained, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern in the general pattern display section 38a is constant regardless of the game state such as whether the open/close execution mode is in progress and whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , specifically set to 5 seconds. Then, when the variable display of the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is started, the value of the normal map normal electric counter is updated from "0" to "1". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing time of the normal pattern normal electric control processing becomes the normal pattern fluctuation process.

However, it is not limited to this, and the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern in the normal pattern display section 38a may be longer or shorter than this. Further, a plurality of types of variable display periods for variable display of patterns in the normal pattern display section 38a may be set, and the variable display period to be executed may be determined by lottery. In addition, instead of executing the general electric open lottery process, in a configuration in which the general electric open state is reliably generated once for the reservation information on the one universal diagram side, the pattern in the universal diagram display unit 38a If the hold information on the general map side is newly acquired in a situation that is not in the general power open state without the variable display being executed, or in the situation where the hold information on the general map side is retained and stored, the general power open state is completed, it may be configured such that a new general/universal power open state is started with the hold information on the general/universal map side as an execution trigger. In addition, on the contrary, even in a configuration in which the general electric power open state is surely generated once for the reservation information of one general pattern side, the variable display of the pattern in the general pattern display unit 38a is executed, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the general power supply open state is started after execution of the variable display of the pattern.

In the processing during normal pattern fluctuation in step S1107, processing for updating the display of the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 38a is executed. In addition, when the value set in the general pattern general electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65 in the general pattern fluctuation start process is "0", the information of the fixed period of the general pattern side of the main side RAM 65 In addition to setting the general electric timer counter, the general electric pattern display unit 38a displays the pattern corresponding to the result of the general electric open lottery process that triggered the execution of the current fluctuation display of the pattern in the general pattern display unit 38a. Execute the process. Then, the value of the general/universal/universal electric counter is updated from "1" to "2". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the general pattern general electric control processing becomes the processing during the general pattern determination.

In the general pattern confirmation process of step S1108, when the value of the general pattern general electric timer counter is "0", the result of the general electric open lottery process that triggered the execution of the fluctuation display times of this pattern is It is determined whether or not the power supply open state is won. If the general electric open state is not elected, the value of the general electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the normal pattern normal electric control process becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process.

If the electric power open state is won, a process for setting the electric power open state is executed. Specifically, "3" is set in the counter for the number of times the mains are disconnected provided in the main side RAM 65 . The general electric open number counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times that the general electric accessory 34a is set to the open state in the general electric open state. In addition, it sets the numerical value information of the open duration (specifically 2 seconds) in the case of opening the general electric accessory 34a once in the general public electric timer counter. In addition, "10" is set in the general electric winning counter. In addition, it starts outputting a drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electric so that the general electric accessory 34a is in an open state. The general electric prize counter is a counter for specifying the remaining game balls that can win the second operation opening 34 in the general electric open state, and every time the winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs 1 is subtracted from the value of the general electric winning counter. Then, when the value of the general electric prize counter becomes "0", the current general electric open state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of times the general electric accessory 34a is opened and the remaining open duration at that time. . After that, the value of the general/universal electric counter is updated from "2" to "3". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the normal/universal power control process becomes the process during the normal/universal power opening. Here, in this embodiment, as already explained, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the number of times the universal electrical function 34a is in the open state in the general electrical open state, the open continuation period when the general electrical accessory 34a is in the open state once, and the second operation port 34 in the general electrical open state The winning upper limit number of game balls is constant regardless of the game state such as whether the open/close execution mode is in progress and whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.

In step S1109 during the electric power open processing, when the winning to the second operation port 34 occurs, the value corresponding to the number of winning prizes is subtracted from the value of the electric power winning counter of the main side RAM65. Then, when the value of the general electric winning prize counter is "0", the value of the general electric open number counter is cleared to "0" and the value of the general electric electric timer counter is cleared to "0". By stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the normal electric accessory 34a, the normal electric utility counter value is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the normal pattern normal electric control process becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process. Also, even if the value of the general electric prize counter is not "0", if the value of the general electric timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the drive unit 34b for general electric. is stopped, the universal electrical accessory 34a is closed and the value of the universal electrical opening counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by one. Then, if the value of the general electric open number counter is not "0", the value of the general electric utility counter is changed to " Update from 3 to 4. As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the general electric power control processing becomes the processing during the general electric power closing. When the value of the general/universal electric open number counter is "0", the value of the general/universal electric counter is cleared to "0" without setting the value in the general/universal electric timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the normal pattern normal electric control process becomes the normal pattern fluctuation start process.

In step S1110 during normal electricity closing processing, on the condition that the value of the normal electricity timer counter is "0", normal Numerical information of the open continuation period (specifically, 2 seconds) in the case of opening the electric function 34a and setting the general electric function 34a to the open state once is set in the general/universal electric timer counter. Then, the value of the general/universal/universal electric counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the processing to be executed in the next processing round of the normal/universal power control process becomes the process during the normal/universal power opening.

As a result of the general electric general electric control processing being executed as described above, with the occurrence of a prize to the through gate 35 as a trigger, the variable display of the pattern is performed in the general pattern display section 38a. Then, in the general electric open lottery process, when the general electric open state is won, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 becomes the open state. It becomes possible to win the game ball to the second operation port 34 by entering the general electricity open state and the second operation port 34 to the open state, and the game ball wins to the second operation port 34 Second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 86.

<Special special train control processing>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing a special figure special electric control process executed by the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG. In addition, special figure special electric control processing is performed in step S213 of timer interruption processing (FIG. 12).

First, a hold information acquisition process is executed (step S1201). In the pending information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the number of pieces of 1 piece of pending information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1302: YES), a process for acquiring the first piece of pending information is executed. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the winning to the first operation port 33 has occurred is made by determining whether or not the first operation winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". The first operation winning flag is set to "1" at step S315 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14) as already described. Also, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

In the process for acquiring the first pending information, the number of unprocessed first pending information stored in the first special figure pending area 85 is first grasped by the main side CPU 63 provided in the main side RAM 65 1 is added to the value of the first special figure reservation counter (step S1303). Incidentally, the display contents of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 are adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display portion 37 c corresponds to the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 . After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 85, that is, in step S1303. Store in the area (step S1304). After that, the first hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1305). When receiving the first hold command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . In the design display device 41, an image display for informing the number of the first reserved information stored in the first special figure reserved area 85 is performed, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the first reserved command. By receiving it, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase of one in the number of pieces of the first reserved information. When a game cycle triggered by the first reserved information is started, the content of the image display is updated to correspond to the fact that the number of pieces of the first reserved information is decreased by one.

When a negative determination is made in step S1301, when a negative determination is made in step S1302, or when the process of step S1305 is executed, it means that a prize has been awarded to the second working opening 34 (step S1306: YES ), on condition that the number of second pending information stored in the second special figure pending area 86 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1307: YES), the process for acquiring the second pending information Run. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the winning to the second operation port 34 has occurred is performed by determining whether or not the second operation winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". As already described, the second operation winning flag is set to "1" in step S319 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14). Also, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

In the process for acquiring the second pending information, the number of unprocessed second pending information stored in the second special figure pending area 86 is first grasped by the main side CPU 63 provided in the main side RAM 65 1 is added to the value of the second special figure reservation counter (step S1308). Incidentally, the display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 are adjusted according to the value of the second special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display portion 37 d corresponds to the number of second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 . After that, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 86, that is, in step S1308. Store in the area (step S1309). After that, a second hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1310). When the sound emission control device 81 receives the second hold command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . In the design display device 41, an image display for notifying the number of second reservation information stored in the second special drawing reservation area 86 is performed, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the second reservation command. By receiving it, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the fact that the number of pieces of the second pending information is increased by one. When a game cycle triggered by the second pending information is started, the content of the image display is updated to correspond to the fact that the number of pieces of the second pending information is decreased by one.

After executing the pending information acquisition process (step S1201), along with reading the numerical information of the special special electric counter provided in the main side RAM65 (step S1202), the special special electric address table provided in the main side ROM64 Read out (step S1203). Then, the start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special special electric counter is obtained from the special special electric address table (step S1204), and the process indicated by the obtained start address is jumped to (step S1205).

The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes of steps S1206 to S1212 in the special figure special electric control process should be executed. , the start address in the program for executing each process of steps S1206 to S1212 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special special electric counter. When the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start processing of step S1206, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1", the special figure fluctuation processing of step S1207 Jump to, if the value of the special special electric counter is "2", jump to the processing during special figure determination of step S1208, if the value of the special special electric counter is "3" special electric of step S1209 Jump to the start process, if the value of the special special electric counter is "4", jump to the special electric open processing of step S1210, if the value of the special special electric counter is "5", of step S1211 It jumps to special electric closing processing, and when the value of the special special electric counter is "6", jumps to special electric end processing of step S1212. Each process from step S1206 to step S1212 will be individually described below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing of step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the special figure fluctuation start process is not executed in the situation where the game round is already executed and in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is executed.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, if the second reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 and the first reservation information is stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 (step S1401: YES, step S1402: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S1403). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure reservation area 85 is moved to the execution area 87 for special figures. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 85 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 85a to 85d to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of first area 85a, third area 85c→second area 85b, fourth area 85d→third area 85c. After that, the value of the first special figure reservation counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display portion 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first reservation information is reduced by one. In addition, in the data setting process, a command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 at the time of the first reduction indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 85 has decreased by one. When receiving the first decrease command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . As already explained in the symbol display device 41, the image display for notifying the number of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 is performed, and the display control device 82 displays the command at the time of the first decrease. is received, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the fact that the number of pieces of the first pending information is decreased by one.

On the other hand, when the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 (step S1401 and step S1402: YES), the first reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information is the first Even if it is stored in the 1 special figure reservation area 85, the second data setting process is executed (step S1404). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure reservation area 86 is moved to the execution area 87 for special figures. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 86 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 86a to 86d to the lower area side. Data in each area is shifted in the order of first area 86a, third area 86c→second area 86b, fourth area 86d→third area 86c. After that, the value of the second special figure reservation counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display portion 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second reservation information is reduced by one. In addition, in the data setting process, a command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 at the time of the second reduction indicating that the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 86 has decreased by one. When the sound emission control device 81 receives the second decreasing command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . As already explained in the pattern display device 41, an image display for notifying the number of the second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 is performed, and the display control device 82 displays the second decrease time command By receiving the command corresponding to , the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the fact that the number of pieces of the second pending information has decreased by one.

Here, when the second pending information is stored as described above, even if the first pending information acquired earlier than the second pending information is stored, the second pending information is for a special figure. is to be shifted to the execution area 87 of . As a result, the second pending information is digested with priority over the first pending information as a game start target.

If the process of step S1403 or step S1404 is executed, the suitability determination process is executed (step S1405). In the success/failure determination process, if the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the target to start the game cycle is the first reservation information, the low-precision success/failure table for the first special figure (see FIG. 9(a)) is stored in the main ROM 64. If the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game cycle is the first reservation information, the high probability success/failure table for the first special figure (see FIG. 9(b)) is read from the main ROM 64 , If the success/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game cycle is the second reservation information, the low probability success/failure table for the second special figure (see FIG. 9(c)) is read from the main side ROM 64, and the success/failure If the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the target for starting the game round is the second reservation information, the high probability table for the second special figure (see FIG. 9(d)) is read from the main side ROM 64. After reading the success/failure table, the information for success/failure determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 is read from the reserved information stored in the execution area 87 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is the above success/failure table. , it is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result. In addition, when the start target of the current game round is the second hold information, if it does not match the numerical information set as the jackpot result, the first small win result and the second small win are displayed in the success/failure table. It is determined whether or not any of the numerical information set for each of the result and the third small hit result matches the above-mentioned information for winning or not.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S1406: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S1407). In the distribution determination process, if the start target of the game cycle is the first reservation information, the distribution table for the first special figure (see FIG. 10(a)) is read from the main ROM 64, and the start target of the game cycle is the first reservation information. If it is 2 reservation information, the distribution table for the second special figure (see FIG. 10(b)) is read from the main side ROM 64. After reading the distribution table, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 is read from the reservation information stored in the execution area 87 for special figures, and the distribution table is referred to. By doing so, it is specified which type of jackpot results the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the distribution determination process, "1" is set to the flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the distribution determination process (step S1408). After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S1409). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the target for starting the game round this time, is stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. It specifies from the result table and stores the specified information in the main side RAM 65 . In the stop result table for the jackpot results, the types of stop modes of the symbols stopped and displayed in the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S1409, the main RAM 65 stores information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S1408. The pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. Any method can be used to select a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is not the big hit result but any small hit result (step S1406: NO, step S1410: YES), the main side RAM65 corresponding to the type of the small hit result specified in the success/failure determination process is set to "1" (step S1411). After that, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b, which is the target for starting the game round this time, is stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance. , and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 65 . In the stop result table for the small hit result, the type of stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the small hit result, and in step S1412. , information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the small winning result specified in step S1411 is stored in the main RAM 65 . The pattern stop mode may be set in correspondence with each small win result on a one-to-one basis, or a plurality of types of picture stop modes may be set for at least some of the small win results. . Any method can be used to select a stop result for small winning results in which a plurality of kinds of pattern stop modes are set. Further, the information on the form of the pattern selected in step S1412 is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S1410: NO), the stop result setting process for the out result is executed (step S1413). Specifically, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game round is stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65 . The information of the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information of the pattern mode selected in the case of the big win result and the information of the pattern mode selected in the case of the small win result, and furthermore, the first It is one type common in the special figure display part 37a and the 2nd special figure display part 37b.

If the process of step S1409, step S1412, or step S1413 has been executed, a variable display period specifying process is executed (step S1414). In the specific process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect will occur on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the ready-to-win effect will occur when any of the big winning results occur in the current game round. Also, if any of the small winning results occur in the current game round, it is determined that the ready-to-win effect will not occur. In addition, when neither the big hit result nor the small hit result occurs in this game round, the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information stored in the execution area 87 for the special figure is used to generate the reach. If the numerical information corresponds, it is determined that the ready-to-win performance will occur, and if the numerical information does not correspond to the occurrence of the ready-to-win, it is determined that the ready-to-win performance will not occur.

When it is determined that the ready-to-win effect will occur, the ready-to-win effect table stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and information on the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the current variable type counter CS is obtained. Set the acquired variable display period information to the special special electric timer counter. Further, when it is determined that the ready-to-win effect will not occur, the table for non-to-win-to-win occurrence stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the information of the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the current variable type counter CS is displayed. get. In this case, each variable display period is set such that the variable display period when the ready-to-win effect occurs is longer than the variable display period when the ready-to-win effect does not occur. Then, the information of the acquired variable display period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The value set in the special special electric timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

The fluctuation display period at the time of reach non-occurrence is set so that the average period becomes shorter as the number of reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 or the second special figure reservation area 86 increases. In addition, in the situation where the success or failure lottery mode is a high probability mode, the reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 or the second special figure reservation area 86 than the situation where the success or failure lottery mode is a low probability mode The variable display period during reach non-occurrence is set so that a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the number is the same.

Further, the variable display period selected when the result is a small win may be shorter than the variable display period selected when the result is a big win, and the variable display period selected when the result is a small win may be shorter. The average value may be shorter than the average value of the variable display period selected when the result is a big win. In this case, it is possible to speed up the completion speed of the game round when the second reservation information is the start target of the game round and a small winning result occurs.

Here, the maximum variable display period selected when the second hold information is the target for starting the game round in a situation where the win/loss lottery mode is a low probability mode is the situation where the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode It is set to a period equal to or less than the maximum variable display period selected when the first hold information is to start a game cycle. In addition, the average period of the variable display period selected when the second reservation information is the target of starting the game round in the situation where the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode and the jackpot result is not obtained is the win/loss lottery mode. is set to a period equal to or less than the average period of the variable display period selected when the first hold information is the start target of the game round in the low probability mode and the jackpot result is not obtained. As a result, even if the second hold information is the game round start target in the low-probability mode, it is possible to prevent the rate of completion of the game round from deteriorating. However, it is not limited to this, and the variation display selected when the second reservation information is the start target of the game round in the situation where the success/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the jackpot result is not obtained The average period of the period is the average period of the variable display period selected when the first reservation information is the target of the start of the game round in the situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the jackpot result is not obtained. The configuration may be set so as to be the same or substantially the same. In this case, "substantially the same" corresponds to the extent to which the player cannot recognize the difference although the average periods are actually different.

In addition, the average period of the variable display period selected when the second reservation information is the target of starting the game round in the situation where the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode and the jackpot result is not obtained is the win/loss lottery mode. is set to a period shorter than the average period of the variable display periods selected when the first hold information is the object of starting a game round in a high probability mode and the result is not a big win. As a result, in the situation of the high-probability mode, the first holding information becomes the target of starting the game round. It is possible to increase the digestion rate of the game times more than in the case of

After executing the process of specifying the variable display period, the command for variation and the type command corresponding to the game round to be started this time are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1415). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S1414, and the game turn to be started is either the first special figure display portion 37a or the second special figure display portion 37b. Contains information indicating whether it is supported. Furthermore, the variation command includes information as to whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, which type of jackpot result. It contains information indicating whether In addition, the type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to the small winning result, and if it corresponds to the small winning result, which type of Information indicating whether it is a small winning result is included.

After that, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display portion which is the start target of the current game cycle out of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b (step S1416). Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1417). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", the value of the special figure special electric counter corresponds to the special figure fluctuation processing (step S1207) by adding 1 becomes "1".

In addition, when the sound emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command, it executes a process for determining the execution contents of the game round effect corresponding to those commands. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the table corresponding to the processing result. As a result, the light emission effect in the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output effect in the speaker unit 54 are executed over the variable display period of the current game round. Further, the sound emission control device 81 transmits to the display control device 82 a command corresponding to the execution content of the game round effect determined this time. By receiving the command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 according to the table corresponding to the command. As a result, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is executed over the variable display period of the current game round.

In this case, when the game round this time is a 16R high probability result, a combination of "7" symbols is stop-displayed on any of the activated lines. Also, if the game round this time is either 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R high probability result or 10R high probability result, the same odd number other than "7" symbol on any of the effective lines The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, if the game round this time is any of 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result, the same even pattern on any of the active lines combination is stopped. In addition, when the current game round is any one of the first small winning result, the second small winning result and the third small winning result, the combination of the same symbols on any of the effective lines is not the combination of the reach symbols. A predetermined symbol combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") that is not a symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, the combination of predetermined symbols that are common in the performance for the game round on the symbol display device 41 is stopped and displayed regardless of the result of the first small win, the result of the second small win, or the result of the third small win. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which one of the first small winning result, the second small winning result, and the third small winning result corresponds, while clearly indicating the occurrence of the small winning result. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the opening/closing execution mode that occurs when a small winning result is obtained. In addition, in the configuration in which the pattern display device 41 stops and displays a combination of predetermined symbols that are common to any of the first small winning result, the second small winning result and the third small winning result, the second In the 2 special figure display portion 37b, a pattern corresponding to the type of the small winning result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can specify which type of small winning result has occurred only by visually confirming the second special figure display portion 37b. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the design display device 41 may also be configured to display the stop result corresponding to the type of the small winning result.

<Process during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S1207 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 38) will be described.

When the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is 1 or more and the fluctuation display period of the current game round has not passed, the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b which are the execution targets of the current game round When it is the update timing of the contents, data setting for updating the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is performed. Thereby, the display contents of the pattern in the special figure display portions 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents of the next order.

Aspect at the start of the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a, 37b, and the update aspect of the variation display of the pattern are performed in a constant manner regardless of the result of the judgment result and the distribution judgment result, and the pattern display device It is carried out in a fixed manner regardless of the content of the presentation for the game round in 41 . For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the pattern rotates once, and a display pattern in which the display order is in a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when the variable display period has passed, the display pattern The stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed regardless of the order of display. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0", that is, when the variable display period has passed, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. After that, the information of the pattern stop mode of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 65 at the start of the game cycle is read. As a result, the variable display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game round is displayed in the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. After that, the information of the final stop period (specifically 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Thereby, the measurement of the final stop period is started. After that, add 1 to the value of the special special electric counter. Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed is "1", the value of the special figure special electric counter corresponds to the special figure fixed processing (step S1208) by adding 1 becomes "2".

When receiving the final stop command, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the command, the symbol display device 41 determines and displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the stop result of the current game cycle over the final stop period.

<Processing during special figure confirmation>
Next, the processing during special figure determination executed in step S1208 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S1501: YES), and if the game result of this game round is a big hit result or a small hit result ( Step S1502: YES), 1 is added to the value of the special special electric counter (step S1503). Since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure confirmation processing is executed is "2", the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special figure start processing (step S1209) by adding 1. ”. On the other hand, if the game result of the current game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S1502: NO), the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1504). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step S1206).

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing executed in step S1209 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If it is before the start of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode (step S1601: YES), if the current game result is a jackpot result, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special special electric timer counter, and if the result of this game is a small hit result, the information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the small hit result (specifically 2 seconds) is set to the special special electric timer counter set (step S1602). After that, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1603). As a result, an effect corresponding to the opening period is performed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section .

If it is after the start of the opening period of the opening and closing execution mode (step S1601: NO), the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0", that is, on the condition that the opening period has passed (step S1604: If YES), the opening/closing count setting process is executed (step S1605). In this case, if the current game result is a 2R low-probability result or a 2R high-probability result, "2" is set in the opening/closing counter provided in the main side RAM 65, and the current game result is a 4R low-probability result or a 4R high-probability result. If the result is a definite result, "4" is set in the open/close count counter of the main side RAM 65, and if the current game result is a 6R low-probability result or a 6R high-probability result, "6" is set in the open/close counter of the main side RAM 65. If the current game result is a 10R low probability result or a 10R high probability result, "10" is set in the opening/closing counter of the main side RAM 65, and whether the current game result is a 16R low probability result or a 16R high probability result. For example, "16" is set in the opening/closing count counter of the main side RAM 65 . If the current game result is the result of the first small win, the opening/closing counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", and if the game result of this time is the result of the second small win, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set. is set to "5", and if the current game result is the result of the third small win, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "10". The opening/closing number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode.

Thereafter, processing for setting an open duration is executed (step S1606). In the setting process, when the game result of this time is one of the jackpot results, the information of the open continuation period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special special electric timer counter. In addition, in the setting process, when the current game result is the result of the first small win, the information of the opening duration for the first small win result (specifically 10 seconds) is set in the special special electric timer counter. However, if the current game result is the result of the second small winning result, the information of the opening continuation period for the second small winning result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special special electric timer counter, and the game of this time is performed. When the result is the third small hit result, the information of the opening duration for the third small hit result (specifically 1 second) is set in the special special electric timer counter.

After that, the processing for setting the upper limit number of winning prizes is executed (step S1607). In the setting process, the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "10" regardless of whether the current game result is a big win or a small win. The winning counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of winning upper limit numbers by the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, a special electric open setting process is executed (step S1608). In the open setting process, data setting is performed so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is put into an open state. After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1609). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric start processing is executed is "3", the value of the special electric electric counter is "4" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S1210) by adding 1. becomes.

<Processing during opening of the special train>
Next, the processing during the special electric power opening executed in step S1210 of the special electric power control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0", that is, when the open continuation period has passed (step S1701: YES), the value of the open/close number counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1702). After that, the information of the interval period (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (step S1703). Also, a closing setting process for the special electric is executed (step S1704). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in a closed state. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1705). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric open processing is executed is "4", by adding 1, the value of the special electric electric counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric closed processing (step S1211). ”.

If the value of the special special electric timer counter is not "0", that is, if the open continuation period has not passed (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not the special electric prize winning device 32 has won ( step S1706). Whether or not the special electric prize winning device 32 has won a prize is determined by judging whether or not the special electric prize winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". As already described, the special electric winning flag is set to "1" at step S311 of the ball-entering detection process (FIG. 14). In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0".

If a prize has been awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S1706: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1707). Then, if the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1708: YES), if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is any jackpot result (step S1709: NO), the processing of steps S1702 to S1705 already described is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step S1708: YES), and if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is any small winning result (step S1709 : YES), after clearing the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 to "0" (step S1710), the processing of steps S1704 and S1705 already explained is executed.

<Treatment during special train closure>
Next, the processing during special electric closing executed in step S1211 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is one of the small winning results, and if the special electric prize winning device 32 has won a prize (step S1801: YES), the main side RAM 65 wins The counter value is decremented by 1 (step S1802). The case where affirmative determination is made in step S1801 means that the special electric prize winning device 32 is detected by the special electric prize detecting sensor 45a when the game ball entered the special electric prize winning device 32 just before the special electric prize winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state. . If the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1803: YES), the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1804).

If the value of the opening and closing counter of the main side RAM 65 is not "0" in the special electric closing process (step S1805: NO), by determining whether the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0", It is determined whether or not the interval period has passed (step S1806). If the interval period has passed (step S1806: YES), on condition that the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results (step S1807: YES), the winning upper limit number Setting processing is executed (step S1808). In the setting process, the winning counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "10".

When a negative determination is made in step S1807, or when the processing of step S1808 is executed, processing for setting an open duration is executed (step S1809). In the setting process, if the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is one of the jackpot results, the information of the open continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set to the special special electric timer counter. set to Further, in the setting process, when the game result of this time is the result of the second small win, the information of the opening continuation period for the second small win result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special special electric timer counter. However, when the current game result is the result of the third small win, the information (specifically, 1 second) of the opening continuation period for the third small win result is set in the special special electric timer counter.

Thereafter, a special electric open setting process is executed (step S1810). In the open setting process, data setting is performed so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 32 is put into an open state. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1811). Since the value of the special electric counter when the special electric closed processing is executed is "5", by subtracting 1, the value of the special electric electric counter becomes "4" corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S1210). ”.

On the other hand, if the value of the open/close number counter of the main RAM 65 is "0" (step S1805: YES), the ending period is set (step S1812). In this case, if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot result, information (specifically, 5 seconds) corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special special electric timer counter. However, if the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is a small win result, information (specifically, 2 seconds) corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the small win result is sent to the special special electric timer counter. set. After that, an ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S1813). As a result, an effect corresponding to the ending period is performed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section . Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1814). Since the value of the special special electric counter when the special electric closing process is executed is "5", the value of the special electric electric counter is "6" corresponding to the special electric end processing (step S1212) by adding 1. becomes.

<Special call end processing>
Next, the special electric end processing executed in step S1212 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has passed (step S1901: YES), the game result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time is any high probability result (step S1902 and step S1903: YES), the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S1904). The high-probability flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify which of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode the winning/failure lottery mode is. It is a probability mode, and when the value of the high probability flag is "0", it is a low probability mode. Therefore, by executing the process of step S1904, the win/fail lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode this time becomes the high probability mode. Also, if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is one of the low-probability results (step S1902: YES, step S1903: NO), the high-probability flag of the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0". (step S1905). As a result, the winning/failing lottery mode after the current opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is any small winning result (step S1902: NO), neither processing of steps S1904 and S1905 is executed. As a result, even if the game result is one of the small winning results and the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the win/fail lottery mode does not change before and after the opening/closing execution mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S1902, when the processing of step S1904 is executed, or when the processing of step S1905 is executed, clear processing is executed (step S1906). In the clear processing, various flags and various counters used in the current game cycle and the current opening/closing execution mode are cleared to "0". However, the high-probability flag of the main-side RAM 65 is excluded from this "0" clearing target. After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1907). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to special figure variation start processing (step S1206).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters one of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, the player can enter any of these ball entering parts The game is played while expecting that the game ball will enter the ball. In this configuration, the entry of a game ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering portion) occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 . As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entering portion or the frequency of entering the ball, and the managed information is used. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which a game ball enters each history target ball entering section. Further, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information.

All the ball-entering units that discharge game balls from the game area PA are subject to execution of history information storage processing and are subject to management using history information. This makes it possible to manage the ball-entering frequency for any history-targeted ball-entering club using the history information. In addition, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entering section to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball entry portion, which triggered the storage of the history information. Thus, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of the game ball into the history target ball entry section.

The history memory 117 stores not only the history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the history target ball entry portion, but also the history information indicating whether the open/close execution mode is being executed, whether the high probability mode is being executed, or not. History information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not is stored. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between each of these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entering section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device, which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, it is possible to read the history information with the reading device, and to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entry portion using the read history information.

A reading terminal 102 is provided in the MPU 62 , and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Either the program or the history information is specified as the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 , and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102 . As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the information to be externally output is either the program or the history information. is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 102 is also used, only necessary information can be read.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration regarding the selection of information to be externally output.

An MPU 62 having a main-side ROM 64 storing programs in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to concentrate the signal paths for the reading terminal 102 within the MPU 62 . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 102 difficult.

A main side CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out a game ball based on the entry of a game ball into one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. Separately, a management side CPU 112 is provided, and the management side CPU 112 executes processing for storing the history information in the history memory 117 . As a result, it becomes possible to manage the manner of entry of game balls into the respective history object entry sections while preventing the processing load of the main side CPU 63 from excessively increasing.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62 . This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 .

The main side CPU 63 stores the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a in each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a-122g. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, the respective signal paths), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to

The main side CPU 63 stores information corresponding to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether or not the high probability mode is in progress, and information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened. , to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, the signal paths), thereby simplifying the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management side CPU 112. becomes possible.

The master side CPU 63 transmits to the management side CPU 112 correspondence relation information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the main side CPU 63 and the history target ball entry section. It is possible to make it

Correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry portion. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116 , and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116 . As a result, every time the main side CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. no longer need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main side CPU 63. FIG.

Information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 by switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is As a result, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, each piece of history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball-entering club corresponding to the history information. As a result, it is possible to use the read history information to specify the manner in which the game ball enters each history target ball entry section.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth, eleventh to eighteenth, 21 to 26 parameters) are calculated. As a result, it is possible to externally output various parameters that are results of calculation using history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding the history information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Further, various parameters corresponding to each of the conditions of the opening/closing execution mode and the conditions of the high-probability mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117 . As a result, the amount of history information exceeding the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and held is erased by overwriting. can be made difficult to occur.

When outputting various parameters to the reading terminal 102 , history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, when reading various parameters to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA, it is possible to refer to not only the various parameters but also the history information that is the basis for calculating the various parameters.

The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

When the main CPU 63 identifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the main CPU 63 transmits output instruction information, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters. , and various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various parameters can be output to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main side CPU 63 .

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified in the process executed by the main CPU 63 when the supply of operating power is started, and the reading device is electrically connected. is specified, information of an output instruction is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where the main CPU 63 or the like is executing the process for starting the supply of operating power, that is, before the main CPU 63 starts the normal process for advancing the game, various The calculation of the parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, thereby reducing the processing load of the management IC 66. can be reduced.

History information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which an external output corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is performed through the external terminal plate 97. . As a result, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal plate 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the game ball can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the history target ball entering section and the frequency of entering the ball.

The through gate 35 is provided at a position where entry of a game ball is restricted in a game state other than the opening/closing execution mode and entry of a game ball is allowed in the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, by shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes possible not only for the game ball to enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric prize winning device 32, but also for the game ball to enter the through gate 35. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When a game ball enters the through gate 35, the holding information on the normal side is acquired, and when the holding information on the side of the normal side is acquired, the second operating port 34 is in an open state with a high probability. becomes. Then, when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, either a big hit result or a small hit result occurs, thereby generating the opening/closing execution mode. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35, the opening/closing execution mode can occur again. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the opening and closing execution modes are continuously generated, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The opening/closing execution mode can occur based on the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 in which the game ball can enter regardless of the game ball entering the through gate 35 . When the opening/closing execution mode occurs as described above, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and the game ball enters the through gate 35, thereby causing the opening/closing execution mode to occur again. In this case, the player expects that the opening and closing execution mode will be started based on the entry of the game ball into the first operation opening 33 in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is not in effect. It is expected that the open/close execution mode will be continuously generated based on the entry of the game ball into.

The probability that the opening/closing execution mode will occur when a game ball enters the through gate 35 is higher than the probability that the opening/closing execution mode will occur when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 . As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game ball entering the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode.

The expectation value that the open/close execution mode occurs after the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the reservation information on the normal side is acquired does not change according to the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the expected value is varied according to the game state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to add excitement to the game. On the other hand, as described above, it is possible to enter the game ball into the through gate 35 in the opening and closing execution mode, so it is possible to give an inflection to the opportunity to acquire the reservation information on the general map side. As a result, it becomes possible to give inflection to the game.

When a game ball enters the through gate 35, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second operation port 34, and when the game ball enters the second operation port 34, a shift to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered. Occur. As a result, in order to continuously generate the opening/closing execution mode, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode, and further enter the game ball into the second operation opening 34. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty of continuous occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode increases, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A special electric prize winning device 32, a second operating port 34 and a through gate 35 are provided at positions where game balls flowing down or having flowed down the right side area PA3 can enter. As a result, by rotating the shooting operation device 28 with, for example, the maximum amount of operation so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3, the special electric prize winning device 32, the second operation port 34, and the through It becomes possible to collectively aim for the winning of the gate 35.例文帳に追加

A game ball can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game during the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, a through gate 35 is provided at a position where game balls can flow in at the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 switches from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. As a result, the excellent effects described above can be obtained simply by setting the positional relationship of the through gate 35 with respect to the special electric prize winning device 32 as described above.

When the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can enter the through gate 35.例文帳に追加As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player can determine not only whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric prize winning device 32, but also whether or not the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. In this state, attention is paid to whether or not the guide plate portion 214 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the open/close execution mode.

At the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, a game ball entry opportunity to the through gate 35 is generated. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player not only when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state but also when it is switched to the closed state.

The guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is formed so that a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 flows leftward along the guide plate portion 214 . When the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where a game ball is placed on a predetermined range X which is a partial range of the guide plate portion 214, the through gate 35 It is provided at a position where it is possible to enter the ball by dropping downward. In this case, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, not only the game ball rests on the guide plate portion 214 in the state where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, but also the game ball on which the game ball rests. exists within the predetermined range X, the opening/closing member 202 needs to move from the open position to the closed position. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the guiding plate portion 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening/closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode. becomes.

On the upstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32, a guide nail group 241 for guiding game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 to the right end side of the opening/closing member 202 is provided. A predetermined range X, which is a range in which a game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the guiding plate portion 214, is set to be biased toward the left end side of the opening/closing member 202. As shown in FIG. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, the opening/closing member 202 needs to move from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down the guide plate portion 214. be. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the movement of the game ball on the guiding plate portion 214, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the special electric prize winning device 32, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists to the left of the predetermined range X which is the range in which the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the guide plate portion 214. is doing. As a result, the game ball that is placed on the guide plate portion 214 but has not reached the entrance portion 45 b enters the through gate 35 . Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage for the fact that the game ball on the guide plate part 214 did not win the special electric prize winning device 32 is changed to the sense of profit for the fact that the through gate 35 wins the prize. becomes possible.

The jackpot results include, for example, the 2R high probability result and the 16R high probability result, and the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high probability result and the opening and closing execution triggered by the 16R high probability result. The ease with which a game ball enters the through gate 35 is different between modes. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the through gate 35 expects the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the through gate 35, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

In a configuration that allows game balls to enter the through gate 35 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed, for example, the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the 2R high probability result and the 16R high probability result. The number of times of opening and closing the special electric prize winning device 32 is different between the opening and closing execution mode triggered by this event. As a result, the expected value of the game ball entering the through gate 35 is increased in the opening/closing execution mode in which the expected value of the game ball entering the special electric prize winning device 32 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened/closed many times.

When a game ball enters the second operating port 34, not only a big win result but also a small win result can occur, and the probability of a small win result is higher than the probability of a big win result. As a result, the entry of the game ball into the second operation opening 34 is caused, thereby making it easier for the opening/closing execution mode to occur. In this case, the ball can be entered into the through gate 35, which causes the second operating port 34 to open in a predetermined situation. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the second actuation opening 34 expects the occurrence of the predetermined situation, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The predetermined situation is a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. Thus, as already described, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs once, it is possible to create a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode occurs continuously, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the low probability mode, the average period of the variation display period of the game rounds that are executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 34 and do not result in a big win is the same as the first operating port 33 in the low probability mode. It is the same, substantially the same, or shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the game rounds that are executed based on the entry of the game ball into the game round and do not result in a big win. As a result, it is possible to prevent the consumption rate of the former game round from becoming extremely worse than the consumption rate of the latter game round. However, if the configuration is provided and the frequency of the second operation port 34 being in the open state with respect to the entry of the game ball to the through gate 35 is constant regardless of the game state, the low probability mode It is assumed that the game is played aiming at the entry of the game ball to the second operation opening 34 at . On the other hand, the game ball cannot enter the through gate 35 in a situation other than the open/close execution mode. Therefore, in the low-probability mode, it is possible to play a game aiming at the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 .

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. It differs from the first embodiment. Also, the configuration of processing executed by the main CPU 63 to allow the management CPU 112 to identify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is inputted to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is inputted to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, and the Although the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, the buffers to which these signals are input are different in this embodiment. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as the high probability mode signal. A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

The thirteenth buffer 122m receives an open/close execution mode signal, the fourteenth buffer 122n receives a high probability mode signal, the fifteenth buffer 122o receives a door open signal, and the sixteenth buffer 122o receives a door open signal. It is decided in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the buffer 122p, and the management side CPU 112 outputs these 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. It is possible to specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to each is input. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l whose signal types are to be recognized, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2001). After that, an identification start signal output process is executed (step S2002). In the output processing, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting it to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the output frequency information corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output frequency information is set in the output frequency counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( step S2003). The number-of-outputs counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is output by the main CPU 63 .

In this embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball-entering section corresponding to the signal type is determined. Outputs the type identification signal the same number of times as The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l are grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry portion corresponding to the types of the signals.

In step S2003, when the value of the output counter for recognition is one of "12", "11" and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Also, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "6", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a corresponding to the out port 24a, the game ball is not paid out. is set to "0". Also, if the value of the output counter for recognition is any one of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball-entering portion does not exist and is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0".

After that, output processing of a start opportunity signal is executed (step S2004). In the output process, by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level, the output of the start trigger signal is started. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2005: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output counter in step S2003, The process advances to step S2006. In step S2006, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In the output process, by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level, output of the type identification signal is started. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2008). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S2008: NO), the process returns to step S2006.

If the determination in step S2005 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S2008 is affirmative, processing for outputting an end trigger signal is executed (step S2009). In the output process, by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level, the output of the termination trigger signal is started. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2010), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement of 1 is "0" (step S2011). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2011: NO), the process returns to step S2003 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting 1. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "0" (step S2011: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S2012). In the output processing, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting it to HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2102). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether or not a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 . If the type identification signal has been received (step S2104: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S2105). The reception number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main side CPU 63 by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S2103.

When a negative determination is made in step S2104, or when the process of step S2105 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2106). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2106: NO), the process returns to step S2104, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2106: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S2107). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 is set in the reception count counter. Stores the value that is specified. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set with "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set with is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the area 123f. Also, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S2108).

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, or when the process of step S2108 is executed, it is determined whether reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S2109). If the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S2109: NO), the process returns to step S2103, and on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main side CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), the processes after step S2104 are executed. Run. If the identification end signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2109: YES), the history setting process in step S2110 and the external output process in step S2111 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 49 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 49(a) shows the period during which the output state of the first signal is HI level, FIG. 49(b) shows the period during which the output state of the second signal is HI level, and FIG. ) shows the period during which the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 49(d) shows the period during which the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 49(f) shows the period during which the output state of the high-probability mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 49(g) shows the timing for adding 1 to the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114, and FIG. 49(h) shows the management The timing at which the side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S2107) is shown.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. , the switching execution mode signal and the high probability mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. As a result, output of an identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. After that, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high-probability mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2101 of the management processing (FIG. 48), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 49(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49(a) from timing t3 to timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49(b) from timing t5 to timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at the timing of t6, 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 as shown in FIG. 49(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t10, as shown in FIG. 49(c). As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t9, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 49(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "1" is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. ” information.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at HI level as shown in FIG. 49(a) from timing t11 to timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the second timing is shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG.

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t25 to timing t27, as shown in FIG. 49(c). As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t26, as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "10" is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. ” information.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 49(c), 49(d), and 49(e), the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high-probability mode signal are at LOW level. to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the ON/OFF execution mode signal, and the high-probability mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2109 of the management process (FIG. 48), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 49(f).

In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize balls corresponding to the entering ball portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of ball-entering parts with the same number of winning balls, the history information cannot distinguish between the ball-entering parts. Specifically, since the number of winning balls is one for each of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34, it is possible to distinguish between the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 . This makes it possible to distinguish between the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information even with the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the second embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, "15" is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to confirmation.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether the high probability mode is in progress, and the front door frame 14 is open or not, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponds to this information without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. ing. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection result of each ball detection sensor 42a-48a is the information that requires the main side CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a-118g to the management side CPU 112. Become. When the management side CPU 112 recognizes the correspondence information, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the trigger for executing various parameter calculations using history information. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are the same as those of the first embodiment.

The management IC 66 is also provided with a calculation result memory 131 in addition to the above. In this embodiment, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time when a calculation trigger occurs, as will be described later in detail. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131 . Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 .

Calculation triggers for various parameters occur before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to differentiate the timing of calculating various parameters from the timing of outputting them to the reading device, thereby distributing the processing load.

In addition, by providing the calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger but also various parameters for multiple calculation triggers can be collectively stored. It is possible to store. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is inputted to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is inputted to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, and a ninth buffer is input. A signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main side CPU 63 to provide the management side CPU 112 with a trigger for calculating various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, similarly to the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p. The management side CPU 112 can specify that the corresponding signals are input to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p without receiving the signals. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for executing calculation of various parameters by the management side CPU 112 in response to occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing power failure information storage processing executed by the main side CPU 63 . The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S2201: YES), output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2202). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level. After that, after executing the power failure processing in step S2203, an infinite loop is entered and the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing power failure handling processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . The power failure handling process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 22). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 is HI level (step S2301: YES), in steps S2302 to S2306, the external output in the first embodiment Similar to steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 28), the number of balls entering each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated. . Further, in step S2307, similarly to step S1007 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated while the front door frame 14 is open. In step S2308, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the process for external output (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. A total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1009 of the process (FIG. 28). Then, information on the calculation result of step S2308 and information on the calculation result of step S2309 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2310). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation results written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S2311, similarly to step S1011 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of various types of balls entered during the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, and in step S2312, the first Similar to step S1012 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated in the open/close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open. Also, in step S2313, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result of step S2314 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2314). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131 . In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation results written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

After that, in step S2315, similarly to step S1015 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of various types of incoming balls in the high-probability mode is calculated, and in step S2316, the first Similar to step S1016 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated in the high probability mode and the front door frame 14 is open. Also, in step S2317, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result of step S2317 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2318). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131 . In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation results written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds. After that, an infinite loop is established, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the external output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2401: YES), output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S2402). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . In this case, when only the various computation results corresponding to one occurrence of the computation trigger are stored in the computation result memory 131, only the various computation results corresponding to the one occurrence of the computation trigger are read by the reading device. When the memory 131 for operation results is read and various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of the operation triggers are stored in the operation result memory 131, the various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of the operation triggers are read by the reading device. .

Thereafter, history information output processing is executed (step S2403). In the output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it becomes possible for the operator using the reading device to perform a detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, clear processing is executed (step S2404). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Also, in the clearing process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". As a result, the operation result memory 131 is initialized.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters for each business day.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, so that the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on instructions from the main side CPU 63 .

Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are sequentially written to the calculation result memory 131 . As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and when the various parameters are read by a reading device, the various parameters can be collectively read out for a plurality of business days.

When various parameters are written into the computation result memory 131, information that enables specification of the timing at which the various parameters are computed is written into the computation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters were calculated.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the trigger are written in the calculation result memory 131 . This makes it difficult for new history information to be written to history memory 117 when the maximum number of history information that can be stored has already been stored in history memory 117 .

Further, the information to be externally output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be externally output. . This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information to be output to the outside.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure handling process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing power failure handling processing executed by the management side CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2501: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2502). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S2302 to S2309, steps S2311 to S2313, and steps S2315 to S2317 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S2502 is within the reference range (step S2503). In particular,
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning to winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34" 8th parameter: K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "For winning to general prize opening 31 "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) are set as parameters to be determined as to whether or not they are within the reference range. Then, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2503.

Note that the predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as predetermined parameters. for example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number K2 of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, it may be determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range. Alternatively, only predetermined parameters to be determined in step S2503 may be calculated in various calculation processes in step S2502.

If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S2503: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2502 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2504). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation results written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S2503: YES), the process of step S2504 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131 when the predetermined parameters are not within the reference range. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, the history is left in the calculation result memory 131, and the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, or if the process of step S2504 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S2505). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After the processing of step S2505 is executed, an infinite loop is entered and the operation power supply to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of the various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131. written. As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced, and the required storage capacity of the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters. The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 56(a) is a flow chart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. Note that the trigger specifying process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S2601). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, addition processing of the incoming ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2602). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is management output process (FIG. 24), based on the number of times step S705 is executed. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entering ball counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2603). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S2603: YES), subtraction processing of the incoming ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the incoming ball counter. After that, output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2605). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level.

FIG. 56(b) is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. As shown in FIG. Note that the calculation process is a process executed instead of the power failure handling process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 22). The history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2701: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2702). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main side CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within the range of one business day. It is possible to finely manage the mode.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. As a result, it is possible to prevent meaningless computation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described fifth embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters. The configuration that is different from the fifth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that the trigger specifying process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S2801). If a negative determination is made in step S2801, 1 is added to the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2802). The continuation counter counts the period during which a game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying in .

If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2803: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). When the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S2803. The stop reference value is set so that The time measurement flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the main CPU 63 should measure time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S2805).

If a negative determination is made in step S2803, if the process of step S2804 is executed, or if the process of step S2805 is executed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" ( Step S2806: YES), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2807). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the operation instruction signal to HI level.

It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the instruction reference value (step S2808). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2808 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2809), and an operation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2810). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it becomes possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being executed from the calculation target of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive the various parameters in the situation in which the game is being executed.

It should be noted that the RTC 115 may be used to measure whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed, instead of using the measurement counter.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from that of the above-described first embodiment, and the occurrence or non-occurrence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. It is performed independently by the management side CPU 112 instead of . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the arithmetic processing is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting processing (FIG. 25).

Corresponds to the occurrence of a game ball entering any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether or not the history information to be processed is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2901). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, addition processing of the entering ball counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2902). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is is specified based on the number of times the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball's entry is stored in the history setting process. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entering ball counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2903). If it is "500" or more (step S2903: YES), subtraction processing of the incoming ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2904). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the incoming ball counter. After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2905). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main side CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within the range of one business day. It is possible to finely manage the mode.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. As a result, it is possible to prevent meaningless computation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA is measured by the management side CPU 112, and the management side CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number. In other words, the management side CPU 112 independently determines the calculation timing of various parameters. As a result, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced because it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute the processing for determining the trigger for calculating various parameters.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 (see FIG. 50), as in the third embodiment. When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters of the calculation results into the calculation result memory 131 . Further, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high probability mode has started, and a signal that indicates that the high probability mode has ended A signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. be done.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that it corresponds to one of the ball-entering sections. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high probability mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. Information corresponding to the end of the high-probability mode is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k, information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth correspondence area 123l. 13 Correspondence area 123m stores information corresponding to completion of opening of front door frame 14 . Therefore, in step S3001, "13" is set to the check target counter.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level (step S3002). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S3003). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S3004). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S3003 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 . Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the correspondence information is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence It becomes a target for reading information.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S3005). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and 1 is added to the numerical information. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S3006).

If the maximum value is exceeded (step S3006: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S3007). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S3008). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. In addition, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation results written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, state information handover processing is executed (step S3009). In the takeover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether the current state is in the opening/closing execution mode, whether the high probability mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open is determined. Determine whether or not there is Then, the status information is written in the management side RAM 114 .

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S3010). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Also, after executing the clear processing, the state information written in the management side RAM 114 in step S3009 is read. Then, when the state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored, the history information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. While writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. If the state information indicating that the high-probability mode is on is stored, the history information indicating that the high-probability mode is on is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. While writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. When the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written.

When a negative determination is made in step S3002, when a negative determination is made in step S3006, or when the process of step S3010 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3012). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S3012: NO), the process after step S3002 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of pieces of history information that can be stored in the history memory 117 is exceeded and the various parameters cannot be calculated accurately.

Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information, which has already been the object of computation of various parameters, from becoming the object of computation of various parameters again.

Moreover, even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the status information transfer process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the state information.

<Ninth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141 , a first status area 142 , a second status area 143 and a third status area 144 . Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the areas 141 to 144, respectively. The second counters 141b to 144b of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th counters 141n to 144n of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth counters 141o to 144o of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from LOW level to HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are the outlet 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the results of ball entry into either the port 33 or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, the eighth to tenth signals corresponding to state information such as whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, whether the high-probability mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state are input. Buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not an object is to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. FIG.

FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3101). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counters are buffers to which status information signals are input (step S3102). Specifically, information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high-probability mode, and information indicating the high-probability mode and the front door It is determined whether or not any of the information indicating the frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, a state information setting process is executed (step S3103). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal switches from HI level to LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether the high-probability mode is on or not is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information of the second state indicating that the high-probability mode is on is stored in the management side RAM 114 . Then, when the output state of the ninth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened. is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and the third state information is erased from the management-side RAM 114 when the output state of the tenth signal switches from the HI level to the LOW level.

If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the data is stored in one of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, which corresponds to the current value of the check target counter and to which a signal of information different from the status information is input. is changed from "0" to "1", the output state of the input signal from the main side CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S3104). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S3105). In the addition processing, one is added to the counter value corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth total counters 141a to 141o in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth total counter 141e is subject to addition, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is subject to addition. .

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S3106). If it is in the first state (step S3106: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S3107). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is added, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is Subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high probability mode (step S3108). If it is in the second state (step S3108: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S3109). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is Subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S3110). If it is in the third state (step S3110: YES), the corresponding counter for the third state is added (step S3111). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the area 144 for the third state of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is Subject to addition.

If the process of step S3103 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S3104, if a negative determination is made in step S3110, or if the process of step S3111 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management-side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S3112). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3113). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S3113: NO), the process after step S3102 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball to the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be changed as described above. It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In this way, by storing information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, in the external output process (FIG. 28) in this embodiment, the output port 24a such as step S1002 is stored. A process of calculating the number of game balls entering the game ball, a process of calculating the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1004, and a process of calculating the number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 such as step S1005. The calculation process and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34, such as step S1006, are not required. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for computing various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31, such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c 31, it is necessary to perform processing for summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. In addition, the number of balls that occur when the opening/closing execution mode is in progress and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls that occur in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 28) in this embodiment. Similarly, it is impossible to distinguish the number of balls that occurred in the high probability mode and the front door frame 14 being opened from the number of balls that occurred in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 28) in this embodiment.

<Tenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the storage means for storing history information. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117 unlike the first embodiment. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main side RAM65. In other words, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores the information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I/F 111. When an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 accesses the main side RAM 65 to read the entry history. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131 . When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, while various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 131, the entry history stored in the main side RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process in this embodiment executed by the main side CPU 63 . The ball-entering detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S3201: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3202). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 as a history of winning balls. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter will be stored in memory. After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 (step S3203).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored for the first bit D1 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S3204: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3205). After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 (step S3206).

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S3207: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3208). After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 (step S3209).

When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3 is switched to the state where the information of "1" is stored, one game is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the special electric winning flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S3211). In addition, 1 is added to the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3212). The special electric prize counter is a counter for storing the number of winning balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 as a history of winning balls. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the special electric prize counter is stored in memory. After that, 1 is added to the value of the counter for 15 prize balls in the main side RAM 65 (step S3213).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S3214: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the first operation winning flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S3215). Also, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3216). The first actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the first actuation opening 33 as the entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter is is stored. Then, 1 is added to the value of the one prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S3217).

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 47a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S3218: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3219). Also, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3220). The second actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the second actuation opening 34 as the entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the second operation counter is stored. After that, 1 is added to the value of the one prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S3221).

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 changes from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the outlet detection sensor 48a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S3222: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3223). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the out port 24a as a history of entered balls. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. retained.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored for the seventh bit D7 is switched to the state in which the information "1" is stored, one game is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3224: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3225).

By executing the ball-entering detection process as described above, the ball-entering history to the out-port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is It is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of balls entered. As a result, every time a ball enters one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. No output is required. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 .

In this embodiment, when a calculation opportunity occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads out the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main side RAM 65, reading the number of balls entering, reading the number of balls entering the first working port 33 from the first operation counter of the main side RAM 65, reading the number of balls entering the second working port 34 from the second operation counter of the main side RAM 65, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read out from the out counter of the main side RAM 65 . Then, the first to eighth parameters described in the first embodiment are calculated using the read numbers of entering balls. However, the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured separately. Therefore, the first to eighth parameters are calculated while including the number of balls that occur when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, since the number of hit balls in the open/close execution mode and the number of hit balls in the high probability mode are not individually measured, the first to eighteenth parameters and the twenty-first parameters described in the first embodiment are not measured individually. The twenty-sixth parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131 . Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters written in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

Instead of the management IC 66 independently accessing the main RAM 65, the information on the number of hits stored as the history of hits in the main RAM 65 is transmitted to the management IC 66 under transfer control by the main CPU 63. It may be configured to be In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112, and the method of storing the ball entry history to each ball entry section. ing. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115 unlike the first embodiment. Also. In addition to the MPU 62 , the main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting section 151 . The notification light emitting unit 151 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63 . The main side CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and uses the information on the history of ball entry to each ball entry section read out from the history memory 117 to calculate various parameters. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the calculated various parameters. The notification light-emitting portion 151 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60. Since the substrate box 60a is transparent, the light-emitting state of the notification light-emitting portion 151 can be seen outside the substrate box 60a. A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided so that visual confirmation can be made from the outside. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11 so that the main controller 60 can be visually confirmed. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emission state of the.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. A signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. 6 signals are input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, and the The signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal. 14 is not input to input port 121 . In other words, no signals relating to ball entry history are input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the stage of designing the management IC 66. It is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 outputs to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. It is possible to specify that an instruction signal is input.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the structure of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the first buffer counter 152a. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the second buffer counter 152b. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third buffer counter 152c. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the fifth buffer counter 152e. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh buffer counter 152g. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of hitting a ball into one are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not an object is to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. FIG.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing history setting processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S3301). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level (step S3302). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "1", the first buffer 122a is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, addition processing of the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S3303). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152 a to 152 o of the history memory 117 . For example, if the check target counter value is "5", the fifth buffer counter 152e is added, and if the check target counter value is "1", the first buffer counter 152a is added.

When a negative determination is made in step S3302, or when the process of step S3303 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S3304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3305). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S3305: NO), the process from step S3302 onwards is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball to the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be changed as described above. It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the external output processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S3401: YES), the output target counters provided in the management side RAM 114 store the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152a. Among 152o, the management side CPU 112 sets the number of counters for which the frequency information is to be output (step S3402). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, so in step S3402 "7" is set in the output counter. .

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read out (step S3403). Of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117, the number of times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value is read out (step S3404). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the object to read the correspondence information, and the n-th buffer counter 152a to 152o reads the frequency information. Be eligible. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the target of reading the correspondence information, and the fifth buffer counter 152e becomes the target of reading the frequency information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a becomes the object of reading the correspondence information and the first buffer counter 152a becomes the object of reading the frequency information.

After that, information output processing is executed (step S3405). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read out in step S3403 and the number of times information read out in step S3404 is output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number-of-times information about the correspondence information to be output this time.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3406). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output object counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3407). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3407: NO), the process from step S3403 onwards is executed for the output target corresponding to the new value of the output target counter. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. Note that the parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, it is determined whether or not there is an opportunity to calculate various parameters (step S3501). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the output port 24a, the general winning port 31, and the special electric winning as in the fifth embodiment. It occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of the operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, various parameters can be calculated by turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 off once and then on again. It is possible to easily generate an opportunity. Then, when the affirmative determination is made in step S3501, as will be described later, the information corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is executed, so that by simply performing the power OFF/ON operation, It becomes possible to grasp the entry state of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the manner in which the game balls enter the game area PA by generating a calculation trigger each time the total number of game balls entering the game ball reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. becomes.

When the calculation trigger occurs (step S3501: YES), the entry history is read out from the counters for storing the entry history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 (step S3501: YES). S3502). Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the entry history is to be read, by the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64. FIG.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S3503). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read out in step S3502 and information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64 to store the ball entry history read in step S3502 from the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the first operation port 33. It is possible to specify which one of the two operation ports 34 corresponds, and it is possible to specify information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S3502. .

Specifically, various parameters calculated in step S3503 are:
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning to winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34" 8th parameter: K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "For winning to general prize opening 31 "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) is calculated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are within the first range (step S3504). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the various calculated parameters are within the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3504. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, setting processing of the first notification state is executed (step S3505). In the setting process, light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to set the first notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting portion 151 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S3504, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are within the second range (step S3506). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters 2 range, an affirmative determination is made in step S3506. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3506, the second notification state setting process is executed (step S3507). In the setting process, light emission of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled so as to enter the second notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting portion 151 emits yellow light.

A negative determination in step S3506 means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S3508). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 151 is in a red light emitting state.

The light emission state set in step S3505, step S3507, or step S3508 is maintained until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151, or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. continue until In addition, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed, the light emission state corresponding to the type of information of the notification state stored in the main side RAM 65 is set. Light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The entry history of the game ball to the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided for notifying contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 . As a result, since the pachinko machine 10 itself notifies the contents corresponding to the various parameters, the manager of the game hall or the like does not have to read out the information stored in the history memory 117, and the number of game balls in the game area PA is increased. It is possible to grasp the manner of entering the ball.

A main control board 61 accommodated in a board box 60a is provided with an MPU 62 and a notification light emitting section 151. As shown in FIG. As a result, unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151 can be made difficult.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 are executed by the main side CPU 63 instead of the management side CPU 112 . This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the content of notification by the notification light emitting unit 151 .

When the calculation result of various parameters corresponds to the first range, it is in the first notification state, and when the calculation result of various parameters corresponds to the second range, it is in the second notification state, and the calculation result of various parameters is The third notification state occurs when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. In other words, instead of notifying the various parameters as they are, the content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters are included is notified. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 151 from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151 .

Note that even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is continued by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151. A configuration may be adopted in which the light emission state in is maintained. In this case, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 151. .

Further, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off, but when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Alternatively, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be controlled to emit light so as to be in a light-emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151 before the start of business in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball entered the previous business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration in which the notification light emitting section 151 is used. may be Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters is output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97 .

The special figure display section 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the general figure display section 38a of the general figure unit 38 may be configured to also function as the notification light emitting section 151. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or the others, , Immediately after the start of supply of operating power, it may be configured to perform notification corresponding to the calculation result in the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition for the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition for the variable display of the pattern in the normal figure display unit 38a is satisfied. A configuration may be adopted in which the display is temporarily interrupted when the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is finished. According to this configuration, it is possible to double use the special figure display section 37a or the normal figure display section 38a as notification means for notifying the entry state of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 relative to the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 . In this case, it is possible to confirm the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring the operation to open the game machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 .

<Twelfth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the configuration for providing the management IC 66 with information on each ball entry result. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of signal paths for inputting the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main side CPU 63 and the management IC 66. FIG.

The detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Also, the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operation opening detection sensor 46a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operation opening detection sensor 47a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed by branching from the middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed by branching from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed by branching from the middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Also, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching from the middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching from the middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main side CPU 63. FIG. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Since there is no need to do this, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are present in the MPU62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and the branch routes SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inputting an abnormal ball entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode is different between the low probability jackpot result and the high probability jackpot result. Execution aspects of the opening/closing execution mode in the present embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is a time chart for explaining how the opening/closing execution mode is executed in this embodiment. FIGS. 71(a1) and 71(a2) show the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, FIGS. 71(b1) and 71(b2) show the execution period of the round game, and FIGS. c2) indicates a period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state. In addition, FIG. 71 (a1), FIG. 71 (b1) and FIG. 71 (c1) are 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result opening and closing execution 71(a2), FIG. 71(b2) and FIG. 71(c2) are 2R high probability results, 4R high probability results, 6R high probability results, 10R high probability results and 16R high probability results. FIG. 10 shows an execution mode of the opening and closing execution mode in a certain case; FIG.

In either the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a low-probability result or the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a high-probability result, the opening/closing execution mode is performed at the timing of t1 as shown in FIGS. The mode is started, and the first round game is executed from timing t2 to timing t3 as shown in FIGS. 71(b1) and 71(b2). In either of the opening/closing execution mode in the case of the low-probability result and the opening/closing execution mode in the case of the high-probability result, the execution mode of each round game is the same except for the final execution round game. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 71(c1) and 71(c2), the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 in each round game is the game It is set to 29 seconds, which is longer than the product of the ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning prizes (10) in the round game.

After that, in the opening/closing execution mode in the case of the low probability result, the last execution round game is executed over the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 71(b1). The execution mode of this round game is the same as the execution mode of the previous round game. That is, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the opening duration of the special electric prize device 32 in each round game is the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the winning upper limit number of the round game ( 10) is set to 29 seconds, which is a longer period than the product. Then, an ending period occurs from timing t5 to timing t6, and the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the opening and closing execution mode in the case of a high probability result, the round game of the last execution is executed as shown in FIG. 71 (b2) over the timing of t4 to the timing of t5. The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed a plurality of times with an interval period interposed therebetween. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71(c2), timing t4-timing t11, timing t12-timing t13, timing t14-timing t15, timing t16-timing t17, timing t18. The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened over the timing from t19 and the timing from t20 to t5. Then, an ending period occurs from timing t5 to timing t6, and the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

In this case, at the timing of t4 to the timing of t11, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, and the timing of t18 to t19, the special electric winning device 32 The open continuation period is longer than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and set to a period shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the winning upper limit number (10) of the round game. Specifically, it is set to 1 second. In this relatively short open duration period, the number of winnings to the special electric prize winning device 32 is about one, and it is possible that no prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs. In addition, since the number of openings of the special electric prize winning device 32 due to the relatively short duration of opening is five times, which is less than the maximum number of winning prizes, this is the timing at which the final opening times due to the relatively short duration of opening ends. At the timing of t19, it is unlikely that the special electric prize winning device 32 has won a prize of the upper limit number of game balls in the last round game. Therefore, the opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 after the timing of t20 occurs with a high probability.

In addition, the relatively short open duration period is supplied from the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 to the right end of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 in a state where the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 is arranged at the open position. The game ball is set to a period during which it can reach the predetermined range X of the guide plate portion 214 . Then, the game ball reaching the predetermined range X can enter the through gate 35 by falling below the opening/closing member 202 by moving the opening/closing member 202 from the open position to the closed position in that situation. As a result, every time the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened for a relatively short duration of opening, an opportunity for the game ball to enter the through gate 35 is generated.

The open continuation period of the special electric prize winning device 32 from the timing t20 to the timing t5 is set to be longer than the relatively short open continuation period. This relatively long open continuation period is set to a period equal to or greater than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the winning upper limit number (10) of the round game, specifically 6 seconds. is set to During this relatively long open continuation period, it can be expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of game balls. In addition, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened during the opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 with the relatively short duration of opening, when the winning of the game ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs, the special electric prize with the relatively long duration of opening During the opening round of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of prizes awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game of the final execution round reaches the upper limit number of prizes.

In the final execution round game of the opening and closing execution mode in the case of a high probability result, after the special electric winning device 32 is opened 5 times with a relatively short opening continuation period as described above, a relatively long opening continuation The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once according to the period, but there is an interval period between each opening time during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in a closed state. That is, as shown in FIG. 71(c2), timing t11 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t14, timing t15 to timing t16, timing t17 to timing t18, and timing t19 to t20. The special electric prize winning device 32 is maintained in the closed state over the timing of . These interval periods are all the same, and are specifically set to 1 second.

As described above, the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs multiple times in the last round game, so that the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32. There are many opportunities for the opening/closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position. As a result, it is possible to give more chances of winning to the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode in the case of a high-probability result. In addition, it is possible to increase the advantage of a high-probability result over a low-probability result.

In addition, since the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed a plurality of times in the last round game with a relatively short open continuation period, the continuation period of the last round game is extremely long. It is possible to prevent In addition, before all the opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32 with a relatively short open duration period are completed, the number of winning game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the last round game is prevented from reaching the winning upper limit number. It becomes possible to

Next, the processing configuration of the main side CPU 63 that enables the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode as described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing special electric start processing in this embodiment. In addition, the special electric start processing is executed in step S1209 of the special electric electric control processing (FIG. 38). Execute the same process. If the opening period of the open/close execution mode has passed (step S3604: YES), the round number setting process is executed (step S3605). In the round number setting process, the round number of the current open/close execution mode is set in the round counter provided in the main side RAM 65 . The round counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of round games in the current open/close execution mode. Specifically, if it is a 2R low probability result or a 2R high probability result, set "2" to the round counter, if it is a 4R low probability result or 4R high probability result, set "4" to the round counter, 6R If it is a low probability result or 6R high probability result, set "6" to the round counter, if it is a 10R low probability result or 10R high probability result, set "10" to the round counter, 16R low probability result or 16R high probability If it is a certain result, "16" is set in the round counter. In addition, if the result is any of the small hits, the value of the round counter is cleared to "0".

After that, the opening/closing count setting process is executed (step S3606). In the process of setting the number of times of opening/closing in the special electric start process, "1" is set in the number of times of opening/closing of the main side RAM 65 as the number of times of opening/closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the round game of the first round game in the case of any jackpot result. If the current game result is the result of the first small win, the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", and if the game result of this time is the second small win, the opening/closing counter of the main RAM 65 is set to " 5" is set, and if the result of the game this time is the result of the third small win, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "10". After that, in steps S3607 to S3610, the same processes as steps S1606 to S1609 of the special electric start process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing processing during special electric open in this embodiment. It should be noted that the special electric open process is executed in step S1210 of the special electric power control process (FIG. 38).

If a prize has been awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S3701: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3702). Then, when the value of the winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3703: YES), it is necessary to terminate the current round game if the result is a big win, and open and close this time if the result is a small win. You need to exit run mode. Therefore, the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3704).

After that, under the condition that the current open/close execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S3705: YES), the value of the round counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3706). Then, the opening/closing count setting process is executed (step S3707). In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "0", no value is set to the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 . In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "1", the open/close count counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" if the trigger for the current open/close execution mode is a low-probability result. On the other hand, if the trigger for the opening/closing execution mode this time is the high accuracy result, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "6". Further, in the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is 2 or more, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Also, a process for setting the maximum winning number is executed (step S3708). In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "0", no value is set to the winning counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current value of the round counter is 1 or more, the winning of the main RAM 65 is performed. "10" is set in the counter as the upper limit number of wins for a new round game. After that, in steps S3709 to S3711, the processing of steps S1703 to S1705 of the special electric open processing (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701 or step S3703, by determining whether the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0", the opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 this time is It is determined whether or not it has passed (step S3712). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, 1 is subtracted from the open/close count counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3713). Then, if the value of the open/close number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3714: YES), and the execution trigger of the opening/closing execution mode this time is any jackpot result (step S3715: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3716). Also, a process for setting the number of times of opening/closing is executed (step S3717). In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "0", no value is set to the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 . In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "1", the open/close count counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" if the trigger for the current open/close execution mode is a low-probability result. On the other hand, if the trigger for the opening/closing execution mode this time is the high accuracy result, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "6". Further, in the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is 2 or more, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Also, a process for setting the maximum winning number is executed (step S3718). In the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "0", no value is set to the winning counter of the main RAM 65, and if the current value of the round counter is 1 or more, the winning of the main RAM 65 is performed. "10" is set in the counter as the upper limit number of wins for a new round game. After that, the processing of steps S3709 to S3711 is executed.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing processing during special electric closing in this embodiment. It should be noted that the special electric closed process is executed in step S1211 of the special special electric control process (FIG. 38).

In steps S3801 to S3804, the same processes as steps S1801 to S1804 of the processing during special electric closing (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. If a negative determination is made in step S3801, or if the process of step S3804 is executed, it is determined whether or not both the round counter of the main RAM 65 and the open/close count counter of the main RAM 65 are "0" ( step S3805). If a negative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined whether or not the interval period has passed by determining whether or not the value of the special special electric timer counter is "0" (step S3806). If the interval period has passed (step S3806: YES), the open continuation period setting process is executed (step S3807). In the setting process, if the trigger of the opening and closing execution mode this time is the second small winning result, the information (specifically, 2 seconds) of the opening duration for the second small winning result is set in the special special electric timer counter. , If the trigger of the opening and closing execution mode this time is the third small winning result, the information (specifically 1 second) of the opening duration for the third small winning result is set in the special special electric timer counter. In addition, in the setting process, if the trigger of the opening and closing execution mode this time is one of the low-probability results, the longest open duration information (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the special special electric timer counter . In addition, in the setting process, if the trigger of the opening/closing execution mode this time is one of the high-probability results and the value of the round counter is 2 or more, the longest opening duration information (specifically 29 seconds) is set. Set the special figure special electric timer counter. Further, in the setting process, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by any of the high-accuracy results and the value of the round counter is "1", the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "6". In the case of "2", information on a relatively short open duration (specifically 1 second) is set in the special special electric timer counter, and when the value of the opening and closing counter of the main side RAM 65 is "1" Sets the information of the relatively long open duration (specifically 6 seconds) to the special special electric timer counter.

After that, in steps S3808 and S3809, the same processing as steps S1810 and S1811 of the special electric closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made at step S3805, at steps S3810 and S3812, the same processes as steps S1812 to S1814 of the special electric closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs a plurality of times in the last round game, so that the game ball is placed on the induction plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32. , the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position. As a result, it is possible to give more chances of winning to the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode in the case of a high-probability result. In addition, it is possible to increase the advantage of a high-probability result over a low-probability result.

In addition, since the opening round on the first half side in the last round game is performed using a relatively short open duration, the duration of the last round game is not excessively long. It becomes possible to do so. Also, before all opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32 due to the relatively short duration of opening are completed, the winning number of game balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the last round game is prevented from reaching the winning upper limit number. It becomes possible to

In the round game of the last execution round in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the high probability result, the opening duration of the last opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 is a period longer than the relatively short opening duration. is set to This relatively long open continuation period is set to a period equal to or greater than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the winning upper limit number (10) of the round game, specifically 6 seconds. is set to During this relatively long open continuation period, it can be expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of game balls. In addition, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened during the opening time of the special electric prize winning device 32 with the relatively short duration of opening, when the winning of the game ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 occurs, the special electric prize with the relatively long duration of opening During the opening round of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of prizes awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game of the final execution round reaches the upper limit number of prizes.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
The round game in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened multiple times is not limited to the last round game, and may be the first round game or an intermediate round game. Further, it may be configured such that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened multiple times in a plurality of round games.

・ It is not limited to a configuration in which an open cycle with a relatively short open duration period occurs in one round game, and then an open cycle with a relatively long open duration period occurs. It is also possible that the opening times only occur a plurality of times.

・A relatively short open duration period allows a game ball to reach a position on the guide plate portion 214 that allows it to enter the through gate 35, but the ball enters the entrance portion 45b of the special electric prize winning device 32. may be set to a period in which it is impossible or difficult to In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which it is possible to win a prize through the through gate 35 in a situation where it is difficult to enter the ball into the entrance portion 45b of the special electric prize winning device 32 . In addition, the configuration may be applied to a configuration in which only one open round occurs in one round game instead of a configuration in which multiple open rounds occur in one round game.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric prize winning device 32, and when the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 In the first embodiment, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, but in the present embodiment, the game ball can enter the ball entering portion other than the through gate 35. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a passage formation body 201, an opening/closing member 202 and a guide member 203 as in the first embodiment. When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, the game ball cannot enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and passes through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening/closing member 202. , the game ball will flow down below the special electric prize winning device 32 . When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, a game ball can be placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, and the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 is discharged into the fourth discharge passage. It becomes possible to enter the ball into the part 45 . Further, in the right side area PA3, a guiding nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 by the guide nail group 241 . Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end portion of the opening/closing member 202 .

The through gate 35 is not provided below the special electric prize winning device 32 in the right area PA3. In this embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left area PA2 of the game area PA. The game ball entry frequency is constant regardless of the game state. Further, when the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided. Therefore, when the shooting operation of the game ball is performed so as to flow down the left side area PA2, it becomes possible to win a prize to the through gate 35, and furthermore, the second operation port 34 opens with the prize winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger. When it becomes a state, it becomes possible to win a prize to the second operation port 34 .

By the way, in this embodiment, a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set as support modes for controlling the state of the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34. FIG. In the low frequency support mode, the general electrical role 34a does not open or the frequency of the general electrical role 34a in the open state is relatively low, and in the high frequency support mode, the frequency of the general electrical role 34a in the open state is relatively low. Relatively high. In the case of a low probability result, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low frequency support mode, and in the case of a high probability result, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high frequency support mode. .

A first special ball entrance 251 and a second special ball entrance 252 are provided below the special electric prize winning device 32 in the right area PA3. The first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 are provided with openings that serve as entrances for game balls vertically upward, and members that directly open and close these entrances is not provided. In addition, the game ball that entered the first special ball entrance 251 is discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24, and the game ball that entered the second special ball entrance 252 is discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24 . Also, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction so that the first special entrance 251 is on the left side and the second special entrance 252 is on the right side. .

The first special ball entrance 251 is provided with a first special detection sensor 251a for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special ball entrance 251, and the second special ball entrance 252 is provided with the A second special detection sensor 252a for detecting a game ball entering the second special ball entrance 252 is provided. These first special detection sensor 251a and second special detection sensor 252a are electrically connected to the main side CPU 63 .

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing ball entry detection processing executed by the main side CPU 63 . The ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When one game ball is detected by the first special detection sensor 251a (step S3901: YES), 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S3902). The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 10 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10-ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When one game ball is detected by the second special detection sensor 252a (step S3903: YES), 1 is added to the value of the five prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S3904). The five prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times five game balls should be paid out. When the value of the counter for 5 prize balls is 1 or more, the 5 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 5 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the counter for 5 prize balls is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the five prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that five game balls are paid out.

Note that other processes are also executed in the ball entry detection process (step S3905). In other processes, the same processes as steps S301 to S325 of the entering ball detection process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed.

Returning to the description of the game board 24 ( FIG. 75 ), the first special ball entrance 251 is arranged downstream of the special electric prize winning device 32 and closer to the passage formation body 201 of the special electric prize winning device 32 . A first guide nail group 253 is provided between the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the first special entrance 251 by a plurality of nails 24b. The first guide nail group 253 allows game balls existing to the left of the first guide nail group 253 to enter the first special ball entrance 251, and the first guide nail group 253 Entry into the first special ball entrance 251 is prohibited for game balls existing on the right side. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball exists on the first range X1 near the passage forming body 201 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, the game A ball can enter the first special ball entrance 251, and other game balls cannot enter the first special ball entrance 251.例文帳に追加

The distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the first range X1 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, specifically twice the diameter of the game ball. However, without being limited to this, the distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 on the first range X1 may be less than the diameter of the game ball, or larger than twice the diameter of the game ball. may be

The second special ball entrance 252 is arranged on the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32 at a position to the right of the first special ball entrance 251 but to the left of the right end of the opening/closing member 202 . A second guide nail group 254 is provided between the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the second special entrance 252 by a plurality of nails 24b. The second guide nail group 254 allows game balls existing to the left of the second guide nail group 254 to enter the second special ball entrance 252, and the second guide nail group 254 Entry into the second special ball entrance 252 is prohibited for game balls existing on the right side. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state in which a game ball exists on the second range X2 near the center on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, the game ball is placed in the second range. A ball can be entered into the second special ball entrance 252, and other game balls cannot be entered into the second special ball entrance 252. - 特許庁In this case, even if the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball exists in a position to the right of the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening and closing member 202, the game The ball does not enter the second special ball entrance 252 . Further, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, the game ball passes through the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 at a position to the right of the second range X2, so the game ball is placed in the second special entry. The ball does not enter the ball opening 252.

The distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the second range X2 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, specifically 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. However, it is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 on the second range X2 may be less than the diameter of the game ball, and more than 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. A large configuration is also possible.

Next, how a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 or the second special ball entrance 252 in the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 77(a) shows a period in which the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 is arranged at the open position, and FIG. FIG. 77(c) shows the period in which the game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, and FIG. 77(d) shows the first special entry. 77(e) shows the timing at which the game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252. FIG.

First, the case where a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 will be described. At the timing t1, the opening/closing member 202 is placed at the open position as shown in FIG. 77(a). Thereafter, the game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. By doing so, the game ball exists in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. 77(b) from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. Then, at the timing t4 when the game ball exists in the first range X1 on the guiding plate portion 214, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in FIG. 77(a). As a result, the game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 77(d). When the game balls enter the first special ball entrance 251, 10 game balls are put out.

Next, a case where a game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252 will be described. At the timing t6, the opening/closing member 202 is placed at the open position as shown in FIG. 77(a). After that, the game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 as shown in FIG. 77(c) from timing t7 to timing t8. Then, at the timing t8 when the game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guiding plate portion 214, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in FIG. 77(a). As a result, the game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252 at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 77(e). When the game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252, five game balls are put out.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes possible not only to enter the game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32 but also to enter the game ball into the special ball entrances 251 and 252 . Then, not only when the game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32 but also when the game ball enters the special ball entrances 251 and 252, the game balls are paid out. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of game balls put out in the opening/closing execution mode, and to increase the advantage of the opening/closing execution mode.

The special ball entrances 251 and 252 are provided downstream of the special electric prize winning device 32 and at positions at which game balls can enter at the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 switches from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. ing. As a result, the game balls that have leaked out as the balls to be entered by the special electric prize winning device 32 enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252, and the game balls enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252 to pay out the game balls. will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's disadvantageous feeling caused by the occurrence of a game ball that has escaped from the target ball of the special electric prize winning device 32 .

When the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric prize winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252. becomes. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player can determine not only whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage portion 45 of the special electric prize winning device 32, but also whether or not the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214. In this state, the player pays attention to whether or not the opening/closing member 202 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

At the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, a game ball entry opportunity to the special ball entrances 251 and 252 is generated. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player not only when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state but also when it is switched to the closed state.

The guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is formed so that a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 flows leftward along the guide plate portion 214 . The special ball entrances 251 and 252 are placed when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where game balls are placed on the partial ranges X1 and X2 of the guide plate portion 214. It is provided at a position where a game ball can be entered by falling downward. In this case, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252, not only is the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 in the state where the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, It is necessary to move the opening/closing member 202 from the open position to the closed position at the perfect timing when the game balls being held are present in the partial ranges X1 and X2. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the guiding plate portion 214 and the switching timing of the state of the opening/closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode. becomes.

On the upstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32, a guide nail group 241 for guiding game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 to the right end side of the opening/closing member 202 is provided. Ranges X1 and X2 of the guide plate portion 214 that allow game balls to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252 are set to be biased toward the left end side of the opening/closing member 202 . As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252, the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the guide plate portion 214. need to move. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the movement of the game ball on the guiding plate portion 214, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the special electric prize winning device 32, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is positioned to the left of the ranges X1 and X2 in the guide plate portion 214 where the game balls can enter the special entrances 251 and 252. exists in As a result, game balls that are placed on the guide plate portion 214 but have not reached the entrance portion 45b enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage for the fact that the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 did not win the special electric prize winning device 32 is reversed to the fact that the special ball entrances 251 and 252 win prizes. It is possible to turn it into profit.

A first special ball entrance 251 and a second special ball entrance 252 are provided as special ball entrances 251 and 252 that allow a ball to enter when the opening/closing execution mode is entered. The number of game balls to be paid out differs between when the game balls enter the second special ball entrance 252 and when the game balls enter the second special ball entrance 252 . Then, when the first condition is satisfied in the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251, and when the second condition is satisfied in the opening/closing execution mode, the game enters the second special ball entrance 252. Ball enters. As a result, the player not only expects game balls to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252 in the open/close execution mode, but also expects the first special ball entrance 251, which is the side with the larger number of game balls to be paid out. The game ball is expected to enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

The first special ball entrance 251 allows the game ball to enter when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball rests on the first range X1 of the guide plate portion 214. placed in position. In addition, the second special ball entrance 252 allows the game ball to enter when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball rests on the second range X2 of the guide plate portion 214. It is set at a position where This not only expects that the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in the state where the game ball rests on either the first range X1 or the second range X2, but also moves to the first range X1. It is expected that the opening/closing member 202 will move from the open position to the closed position in the state where the game ball is placed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the structure in which the game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 are guided to the right end side of the opening/closing member 202 by providing the guiding nail group 241, the second range X2 is set to the center side of the opening/closing member 202 in the horizontal direction. In addition, the first range X1 is set at a position where the opening/closing member 202 is biased toward the left end side. Further, the entrance portion 45b of the special electric prize winning device 32 is present on the left side of the opening/closing member 202. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game balls existing at a position closer to the entrance portion 45b of the special electric prize winning device 32 on the guide plate portion 214 are more likely to enter the first special ball entrance 251 with a larger number of payouts. In this case, it is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation in which the disadvantage that the game ball unfortunately did not enter the entrance portion 45b of the special electric prize winning device 32 becomes stronger.

<Another form of the fourteenth embodiment>
- Only one of the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 may be provided. In addition to the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252, a third special ball entrance is provided, which opens and closes when a game ball is placed in the third range of the guide plate portion 214. The game ball may enter the third special ball entrance when the member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position.

・Even if the game ball enters either the first special ball entrance 251 or the second special ball entrance 252, it is not limited to the configuration in which only the game ball is paid out. When the game ball enters the ball opening 251, the first reservation information or the second reservation information that triggers the success/failure determination process is acquired, and when the game ball enters the second special ball opening 252, A configuration in which game balls are paid out may be employed. In this case, when a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 and when a game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252, different benefits are given.

Further, for example, when the game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251, one of the first reservation information and the second reservation information is acquired, and the game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252. In some cases, the other of the first pending information and the second pending information may be acquired. As a result, even if the game ball enters any of the special entrances 251 and 252, the hold information that triggers the success/failure determination process is acquired, but the type of hold information acquired is the first special entrance. The case where the game ball enters the opening 251 and the case where the game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252 are different.

Also, for example, even if the game ball enters any of the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252, although the reservation information on the general map side is acquired, A configuration may be adopted in which the probability that the second operating port 34 is in the normal/electrical open state is different with respect to the information.

The first range X1 is not limited to a configuration narrower than the second range X2, and the width of the first range X1 and the width of the second range X2 may be the same or substantially the same. The first range X1 may be wider than the second range X2.

- The special ball entrances 251 and 252 are not limited to the configuration in which the game balls entering the special ball entrances 251 and 252 are led out to the back side of the game board 24, and the special ball entrances 251 and 252 are provided in a gate shape. Therefore, the game balls entering the special ball entrances 251 and 252 may continue to flow down the game area PA thereafter. This makes it easier for the game ball to reach the lower area PA4.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, instead of the special electric prize winning device 32, a first special electric prize winning device 261 and a second special electric prize winning device 262 are provided. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In place of the special electric prize winning device 32, a first special electric prize winning device 261 and a second special electric prize winning device 262 are provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 262 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction so that the first special electric prize winning device 261 is on the upper side and the second special electric prize winning device 262 is on the lower side. In addition, in the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided as an entrance portion that causes the general electrical role 34a of the second operating port 34 to open. A first thru gate 263 and a second thru gate 264 are provided as an entrance portion that generates a trigger to open the object 34a. The first through gate 263 is provided on the left side of the first special electric prize winning device 261 , and the second through gate 264 is provided on the left side of the second special electric prize winning device 262 .

The configuration of the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the configuration of the first through gate 263 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b). 79(a) and 79(b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 78. FIG.

A first big winning opening 265 is formed in the game board 24 so as to pass through the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the first big prize winning opening 265 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3, but a position to the right of the first through gate 263 . A first special electric prize winning device 261 is provided to prevent or allow entry of game balls into the first big prize winning port 265 . The first special electric prize winning device 261 has a first guide plate 271 provided so as to pass through the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the first special prize winning opening 265 . The first guide plate 271 is driven by a driving means (not shown) so as to be movable in the front-rear direction. , and a guide position where the pachinko machine 10 is slid forward from the blocking position and the amount of projection from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximized.

A first ball receiving portion 272 is provided above the right end portion of the first guide plate 271 on the game board 24, and furthermore, in the right area PA3, above the first special electric winning device 261, there is a right side area from the upper area PA1. A first guide nail group 267 is provided for guiding all game balls that have flowed into the area PA3 to the first ball receiving portion 272 (see FIG. 78). The first guide peg group 267 is formed by arranging a plurality of pegs 24b so as to slope downward to the right. All game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 are guided to the first ball receiving portion 272 by the first guide nail group 267 . The distance dimension between the front end portion of the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 slopes downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 flows down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to its own weight.

When the first guide plate 271 is located at the blocking position, the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 79(a). is also large. At this blocked position, the front end of the first guide plate 271 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272 . Therefore, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 in a situation where the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52. It will drop below the first ball receiving portion 272 . In addition, the game ball guided by the first guide nail group 267 bounces on the first ball receiving portion 272, so that the first guide plate 271 arranged at the blocking position is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24. It is also envisioned that it rests on the top surface of a region that protrudes into the On the other hand, in the first guide plate 271 arranged at the blocking position, the upper surface of the area protruding to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 is inclined downward to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, even if a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 arranged at the blocking position, the game ball does not enter the first big winning port 265 and the first through gate 263 and the first guide plate It will drop below the first guide plate 271 from between the front end of 271 and the window panel 52 . Due to the above configuration, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position, the occurrence of winning to the first big winning opening 265 is blocked and the occurrence of winning to the first through gate 263 is blocked. be done.

When the first guide plate 271 is placed at the guidance position, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is larger than the radius of the game ball. is also smaller. At this guiding position, the front end of the first guide plate 271 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272 . Therefore, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 in the state where the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guiding position projects from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 on the first guide plate 271. It will be placed on the upper surface of the area where the

On the upper surface of the protruding area 273 that protrudes to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 when arranged at the guiding position on the first guide plate 271, a boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface is provided. 274 are formed. With the boundary portion 274 as a boundary, the upper surface of the protruding region 273 is composed of a first guide region 275 existing in front of the first ball receiving portion 272 and a first guide region 275 located to the left of the first guide region 275 and the first big prize winner. It is partitioned into a second guide region 276 leading to the mouth 265 and a third guide region 277 to the left of the first guide region 275 and in front of the second guide region 276 and leading to the first through gate 263. there is The upper surface of the first guide area 275 slopes down toward the left. Also, the left end of the first guidance region 275 is in contact with both the right end of the second guidance region 276 and the right end of the third guidance region 277 . As a result, the game ball guided from the first ball receiving portion 272 to the first guide area 275 flows down to the second guide area 276 or the third guide area 277 by its own weight. In this case, the area where the left end of the first guidance area 275 contacts the right edge of the second guidance area 276 is wider than the area where the left end of the first guidance area 275 contacts the right end of the third guidance area 277 . Therefore, the game ball guided by the first guidance area 275 flows into the second guidance area 276 more easily than the third guidance area 277 . However, game balls guided by the first guidance area 275 flow into the third guidance area 277 at a predetermined frequency (specifically, one out of four).

The upper surface of the second guide area 276 is inclined downward to the left rear so as to guide the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guide area 276 to the first big winning opening 265 . As a result, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guide area 276 is likely to enter the first big winning hole 265 . A game ball that has won the first big winning hole 265 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first big winning hole 265 . This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not the first big prize winning port 265 is won based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of the round game or the small win in which the first big winning hole 265 is to be opened, it is specified that one game ball has entered the first big winning hole 265. If so, 1 is subtracted from the prize winning counter value of the main side RAM 65 . When the value of the prize winning counter becomes "0", it is specified that the winning of the maximum number of prizes has occurred as in the first embodiment, and the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of the round game or the small win is executed. terminate.

The third guiding region 277 slopes down toward the left. Here, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position, the first guide plate 271 exists from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the first through gate 263 in the horizontal direction. It will be done. Further, as already explained, the dimension of the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 arranged at the guidance position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guide area 277 moves to the second guide area 276 for some reason, it flows down toward the first through gate 263 by its own weight, and the first through gate 263 You will win a prize. A game ball that has won the first through gate 263 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first through gate 263 . This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not the first through gate 263 has won a prize based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the first through gate 263, the general electric The numerical value information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c as the general pattern reservation information.

With the above configuration, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the round game in which the first special electric winning device 261 is the control target or the small hit result in which the first special electric winning device 261 is the control target, the first induction plate 271 When arranged at the guidance position, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is guided to either the first large winning opening 265 or the first through gate 263, and the first large winning opening 265 or the first through gate 263 You are guaranteed to win one of them. When a prize is awarded to the first big prize winning port 265, the remaining number of the winning upper limit number is subtracted by 1, and 15 game balls, which are the specific number, are paid out in the same manner as in the first embodiment. be. When a prize to the first through gate 263 is generated, an acquisition opportunity for holding information on the normal diagram side is generated. As a result, when the first special electric prize winning device 261 becomes the object of control, the player can expect both the prize winning to the first big prize winning port 265 and the prize winning to the first through gate 263 to occur. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Next, the configuration of the second special electric prize winning device 262 and the configuration of the second through gate 264 will be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG.

A second big winning opening 266 is formed in the game board 24 so as to pass through the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the second big prize winning port 266 is formed is a position below the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the first through gate 263 and vertically below the first big prize winning port 265 . Further, the position where the second big prize winning opening 266 is formed is a position on the right side of the second through gate 264, although it is near the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3.

A second special electric prize winning device 262 is provided to prevent or allow entry of game balls into the second big prize winning port 266 . The second special electric prize winning device 262 is provided with a second guide plate 281 provided so as to pass through the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the second big prize winning opening 266 . The second guide plate 281 is driven by a drive means (not shown) so as to be movable in the front-rear direction. , and a guide position where the pachinko machine 10 is slid forward from the blocking position and the amount of projection from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximized.

A second ball receiving portion 282 is provided above the right end portion of the second guide plate 281 on the game board 24, and a first big prize is provided above the second special electric prize winning device 262 in the right side area PA3. A second guide nail group 268 is provided for guiding all the game balls that have flowed into the lower part of the first special electric prize winning device 261 without entering the opening 265 and the first through gate 263 to the second ball receiving portion 282. (See Figure 78). The second guide nail group 268 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to slope downward to the right. All game balls that have flowed down below the first special electric prize winning device 261 in the right area PA3 are guided to the second ball receiving portion 282 by the second guide nail group 268 . The distance dimension between the front end portion of the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. The upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 slopes downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 flows down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to its own weight.

When the second guide plate 281 is placed at the blocking position, the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, as with the first guide plate 271. large size. At this blocking position, the front end of the second guide plate 281 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282 . Therefore, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 in a situation where the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52. It will drop below the second ball receiving portion 282 . In addition, the game ball guided by the second guide nail group 268 bounces on the second ball receiving portion 282, so that the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position is positioned on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24. It is also envisioned that it rests on the top surface of a region that protrudes into the On the other hand, in the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position, the upper surface of the area protruding to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 is inclined downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加. Therefore, even if a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 arranged at the blocking position, the game ball does not enter the second big winning port 266 and the second through gate 264 and the second guide plate It will drop below the second guide plate 281 from between the front end of 281 and the window panel 52 . Due to the above configuration, when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the blocking position, the occurrence of winning to the second big winning opening 266 is blocked and the occurrence of winning to the second through gate 264 is blocked. be done.

When the second guide plate 281 is placed at the guide position, the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is larger than the radius of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 80(a). is also smaller. At this guidance position, the front end of the second guide plate 281 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282 . Therefore, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 in the state where the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guiding position projects from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 on the second guide plate 281. It will be placed on the upper surface of the area where the

On the upper surface of the protruding area 283 that protrudes to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 when arranged at the guiding position on the second guide plate 281, a boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface is provided. 284 is formed. With the boundary portion 284 as a boundary, the upper surface of the protruding region 283 is composed of a first guiding region 285 existing in front of the second ball receiving portion 282 and a second big prize winning area located to the left of the first guiding region 285. It is partitioned into a second guiding region 286 leading to the mouth 266 and a third guiding region 287 to the left of the first guiding region 285 and in front of the second guiding region 286 and leading to the second through gate 264. there is The upper surface of the first guide area 285 slopes down toward the left. Also, the left end of the first guidance region 285 is in contact with both the right end of the second guidance region 286 and the right end of the third guidance region 287 . As a result, the game ball guided from the second ball receiving portion 282 to the first guide area 285 flows down to the second guide area 286 or the third guide area 287 by its own weight. In this case, the area where the left end of the first guidance area 285 contacts the right edge of the second guidance area 286 is wider than the area where the left end of the first guidance area 285 contacts the right end of the third guidance area 287 . Therefore, the game ball guided by the first guidance area 285 flows into the second guidance area 286 more easily than the third guidance area 287 . However, game balls guided by the first guidance area 285 flow into the third guidance area 287 at a predetermined frequency (for example, one out of seven).

The upper surface of the second guide area 286 is inclined downward to the left rear so as to guide the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guide area 286 to the second big winning opening 266 . Thereby, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the second guide area 286 is likely to enter the second big winning hole 266 . A game ball that has won the second big winning hole 266 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second big winning hole 266 . This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a prize in the second big prize winning opening 266 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of the round game or the small win in which the second big winning hole 266 is to be opened, it is specified that one game ball has entered the second big winning hole 266. If so, 1 is subtracted from the prize winning counter value of the main side RAM 65 . When the value of the prize winning counter becomes "0", it is specified that the winning of the maximum number of prizes has occurred as in the first embodiment, and the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of the round game or the small win is executed. terminate.

The third guiding region 287 slopes down toward the left. Here, when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position, the second guide plate 281 exists from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the second through gate 264 in the horizontal direction. It will be done. Also, as already explained, the dimension of the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 arranged at the guidance position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guide area 287 moves to the second guide area 286 for some reason, it flows down toward the second through gate 264 by its own weight, and the second through gate 264 You will win a prize. A game ball that has won the second through gate 264 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second through gate 264 . This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not the second through gate 264 has won a prize based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the second through gate 264, the general electric The numerical value information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c as the general pattern reservation information.

With the above configuration, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the round game in which the second special electric winning device 262 is the control target or the small hit result in which the second special electric winning device 262 is the control target, the second induction plate 281 When arranged at the guidance position, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 is guided to either the second large prize winning port 266 or the second through gate 264, and the second large prize winning port 266 or the second through gate 264 You are guaranteed to win one of them. When a prize is awarded to the second big prize-winning port 266, the remaining number of prize-winning upper limit numbers is decremented by 1 and 15 game balls, which are the specific number, are paid out in the same manner as in the first embodiment. be. When the winning to the second through gate 264 occurs, an acquisition opportunity of the hold information on the general map side occurs. As a result, when the second special electric prize winning device 262 becomes a control target, the player can expect both the prize winning to the second big prize winning port 266 and the prize winning to the second through gate 264 to occur. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Here, the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 262 are compared with reference to FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b). FIG. 80(a) is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 78 as already explained, showing the second special electric prize winning device 262 when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guiding position, and FIG. 80(b). 78A is a cross-sectional view along the line A-A showing the first special electric prize winning device 261 when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position.

As shown in FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b), the dimension of the left end of the first guide region 275 in the first guide plate 271 and the dimension of the left end of the first guide region 275 in the second guide plate 281 are the same. Or they are substantially the same. In this case, the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guide region 277 is in contact with the entire left end of the first guide region 275 in the first guide plate 271 is It is larger than the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guidance region 287 is in contact with the entire left end. Then, in relation to the configuration, when the first special electric winning device 261 is in an open state (that is, when the first guide plate 271 is placed at the guide position), the game placed on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 The probability that the ball is guided to the first through gate 263 is the second guide plate 281 when the second special electric prize winning device 262 is in an open state (that is, when the second guide plate 281 is placed at the guide position). It is higher than the probability that the game ball on the upper surface is guided to the second through gate 264.例文帳に追加Conversely, when the first special electric prize winning device 261 is in the open state (that is, when the first guide plate 271 is placed at the guide position), the game ball on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 is the first big prize. The probability of being guided to the mouth 265 is the number of games placed on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 when the second special electric winning device 262 is in the open state (that is, when the second guide plate 281 is placed at the guide position). It is lower than the probability that the ball is guided to the second big winning hole 266. As a result, the easiness of occurrence of winning to the big winning openings 265 and 266 and the through gate 263 are determined according to the type of the special electric winning device to be controlled among the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262. , 264 can be differentiated.

As already explained, the first guide nail group 267 is provided above the first special electric prize winning device 261, and the first guide nail group 267 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the front of the first ball receiver 272. (see Figure 78). On the other hand, the first through gate 263 is provided below the first guide nail group 267 and to the left of the first special electric prize winning device 261 in the right area PA3. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 does not enter the first through gate 263 without passing through the area in which the first special electric prize winning device 261 is provided.

On the other hand, the second guide nail group 268 provided between the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the second special electric prize winning device 262 guides the game balls that have flowed below the first special electric prize winning device 261 to the second ball receiving portion 282. Although provided to guide, the second guide nail group 268 does not enter the first through gate 263 side of the left end of the first special electric prize winning device 261 (see FIG. 78). A second through gate 264 is provided at a position vertically below the first through gate 263, and the first through gate 263 is configured such that a game ball passes through a gate hole penetrating vertically. Therefore, the game ball that has won the first through gate 263 can also win the second through gate 264, and the game ball that has won the first through gate 263 can easily win the second through gate 264.例文帳に追加When one game ball wins the first through gate 263 and wins the second through gate 264, it is normal on the condition that the upper limit number of reservation information on the side of the normal pattern is not acquired in the normal pattern reservation area 65c. Two pieces of hold information on the drawing side are acquired. Therefore, from this point of view as well, holding information on the general map side is more likely to be acquired when the first special electric prize winning device 261 becomes the control target than when the second special electric prize winning device 262 becomes the control target.

Next, the contents of the success/failure table in this embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. Figure 81 (a) shows the low probability table for the first special figure, Figure 81 (b) shows the high probability table for the first special figure, Figure 81 (c) is for the second special figure Shows a low certainty table, Figure 81 (d) shows a high certainty table for the second special figure.

As in the first embodiment, the validity table for the first special figure includes a low probability table for the first special figure and the first special figure as shown in FIGS. There is provided a high-probability table for Only the jackpot result and the missing result are set as the game results in the low certainty table for the first special figure and the high certainty table for the first special figure, and the high certainty table for the first special figure The probability that the big hit result is selected is set higher than the low certainty table for the first special figure.

As in the first embodiment, the validity table for the second special figure includes the low probability table for the second special figure and the second special figure as shown in FIGS. There is provided a high-probability table for In the low-probability table for the second special figure and the high-probability table for the second special figure, a big winning result, a first small winning result and a second small winning result are set as game results. . The probability that the big hit result is selected is set higher in the high probability table for the second special figure than in the low probability table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the probability that either the first small winning result or the second small winning result is selected is set higher in the low certainty table for the second special figure than in the high certainty table for the second special figure. ing.

Next, the manner of execution of the opening/closing execution mode will be described. FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, as a jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 82(a), 2R low probability result, 2R high probability result, 4R low probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R There are a low probability result, a 6R high probability result, a 10R low probability result, a 10R high probability result, a 16R low probability result and a 16R high probability result. The number of round games in the open/close execution mode, the upper limit number of winning round games, the open continuation period and the interval period of each round game in the case of each jackpot result are the same as those in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the types of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled in the opening/closing execution mode differ according to the types of the jackpot results. Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by any of the 2R high probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R high probability result and 16R high probability result, the first special electric winning device in each round game 261 is to be controlled, 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result and 16R low probability result In the opening and closing execution mode triggered by each round game Then, the second special electric prize winning device 262 becomes a control target. Thereby, the hold information on the general map side is more likely to be acquired in the open/close execution mode than when the high probability result is obtained and the low probability result is obtained. On the other hand, winning to the large winning openings 265 and 266 is less likely to occur in the open/close execution mode when the high probability result is obtained than when the low probability result is obtained.

Here, the open continuation period of each round game is set to 29 seconds, and the winning upper limit number of each round game is set to ten. In this case, since the game ball shooting cycle is 0.6 seconds, about 48 game balls can be supplied to the position of the first special electric prize winning device 261 before the opening continuation period of each round game elapses. On the other hand, as already explained, three game balls among the four game balls guided to the first guidance area 275 of the first guide plate 271 in the first special electric winning device 261 Winning, one game ball wins the first through gate 263. - 特許庁Then, it is calculated that 36, which is 3/4 of the 48, are guided to the first big winning opening 265, and this number is larger than the winning upper limit number. Therefore, even if the first special electric prize winning device 261 becomes a control object, the winning upper limit number of game balls can win the first big prize winning port 265 in each round game. Incidentally, during the period in which the guide plates 271 and 281 of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are held at the guide positions in each round game, game balls that have reached the ball receiving portions 272 and 282 are guided to the corresponding through gates 263 and 264. set to a period longer than the shortest period required for the game ball to fall from the left end of the guide plate 271, 281 toward the corresponding through gate 263, 264 after reaching the ball receiving part 272, 282 when the game ball It is

As already explained, in this embodiment, as the small winning result, the first small winning result and the second small winning result are set as shown in FIG. 82(b). The upper limit number of wins in the opening/closing execution mode, opening continuation period, opening number of times, and interval period are all the same in the case of these small winning results. On the other hand, the types of the special electric winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled in the opening/closing execution mode are different according to the types of small winning results. Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the first small hit result, the first special electric winning device 261 is controlled, whereas in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second small hit result, the second special electric The winning device 262 is the object of control. As a result, when the first small winning result is obtained, the holding information on the normal drawing side is more likely to be acquired in the opening/closing execution mode than when the second small winning result is obtained. On the other hand, winning to the big winning openings 265 and 266 in the opening/closing execution mode is less likely to occur when the first small winning result is obtained than when the second small winning result is obtained. By the way, the period during which the guide plates 271 and 281 of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are held at the guide position in each open round of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of the small hit is is guided to the corresponding through gates 263, 264, the game ball reaches the ball receiving portions 272, 282 and then falls from the left ends of the guide plates 271, 281 toward the corresponding through gates 263, 264. is set to a period longer than the shortest period required to

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the opening setting process for the special electric which is executed by the main side CPU 63 . The open setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special electric start process (FIG. 42) and step S1810 of the special electric closed process (FIG. 44).

First, it is determined whether or not the current controlled object is the first special electric prize winning device 261 (step S4001). If the opening and closing execution mode of this time is triggered by any high probability result or the first small hit result, the first special electric winning device 261 is the object of control, and the opening and closing execution mode of this time is either low probability result or When triggered by the result of the second small hit, the second special electric prize winning device 262 is the object of control.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, open setting processing of the first special electric prize winning device 261 is executed (step S4002). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the driving means of the first special electric prize winning device 261 so that the first guide plate 271 of the first special electric prize winning device 261 is arranged at the guiding position. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4001, an opening setting process for the second special electric prize winning device 262 is executed (step S4003). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the driving means of the second special electric prize winning device 262 so that the second guide plate 281 of the second special electric prize winning device 262 is arranged at the guiding position. As a result, the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 corresponding to the big winning result or the small winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode are opened.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state, the game ball can enter the through gates 263 and 264, so when the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state, the game Players expect to win both special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 and through gates 263 and 264 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the state where the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state.

The through gates 263, 264 are game balls placed on the guide plates 271, 272 arranged at the guide positions, and the game balls flowed down on the guide plates 271, 272 to a side different from the side of the big winning openings 265, 266. It is provided at a position where a ball can enter. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game balls placed on the guide plates 271 and 272, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is guided to the right end side of the guide plates 271 and 272 by the guide nail groups 267 and 268. FIG. In this case, the big prize openings 265 and 266 and the through gates 263 and 264 are provided on the left side of the guide plates 271 and 272 . As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to how the game ball flows down on the guide plates 271 and 272 .

The areas of the guide plates 271 and 272 that allow game balls to enter the through gates 263 and 264 are to the left of the big winning openings 265 and 266, i. exists on the side. As a result, the game ball placed on the guide plates 271, 272 does not enter the big winning openings 265, 266, which causes the player to feel disadvantageous, and conversely, the winning of the through gates 263, 264 occurs. It will be possible to change it to a sense of profit for

A first special electric prize winning device 261 and a second special electric prize winning device 262 are provided as special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262, and a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as through gates 263 and 264. there is Then, by being guided by the first guide plate 271 of the first special electric prize winning device 261, it is possible to enter the first through gate 263, and by being guided by the second guide plate 272 of the second special electric prize winning device 262, Winning to the second through gate 264 becomes possible. In this case, by differentiating the types of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 that are subject to execution of the opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode, the percentage of game balls entering the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 and the through gates 263 and 264, respectively. can be made different.

The probability that the game ball on the first guide plate 271 enters the first through gate 263 and the probability that the game ball on the second guide plate 272 enters the second through gate 264 are different. . As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 that are the target of execution of the opening/closing control.

For example, the 2R low-probability result and the 2R high-probability result differ in the types of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 that are subject to execution of the opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the type of game result that triggers the execution of the opening/closing execution mode.

The second through gate 264 exists downstream of the first through gate 263 in the direction in which the game ball flows. As a result, when the first special electric prize winning device 261 is subject to execution of the opening/closing control, not only can the game ball enter the first through gate 263, but also the game ball can enter the second through gate 264. will be obtained. Therefore, a player who expects to obtain hold information on the general map side expects that the first special electric prize winning device 261 will be subject to execution of opening/closing control.

When the game ball enters the first through gate 263 and when the game ball enters the second through gate 264, the same privilege of acquiring the reservation information on the normal map side is given. This makes it possible to suppress the sense of disadvantage felt by the player regardless of whether the execution target of the opening/closing control is the first special electric prize winning device 261 or the second special electric prize winning device 262 .

<Another form of the fifteenth embodiment>
A configuration may be adopted in which the types of special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be subjected to opening/closing control are changed in the middle of one opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to change the ratio of the ball entry expectation between the big winning openings 265 and 266 and the through gates 263 and 264 during the open/close execution mode.

・The game ball entering the first through gate 263 is not limited to the configuration in which the game ball entering the second through gate 264 is allowed. A configuration may be adopted in which it is impossible to enter a ball, and a game ball entering the second through gate 264 is not allowed to enter the first through gate 263 .

- Although the configuration is such that no members for directly opening and closing the large winning openings 265 and 266 are provided, a configuration may be employed in which a member for directly opening and closing the large winning openings 265 and 266 is provided. For example, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position, the first guide plate 271 faces the first large prize winning port 265 at a position close to the first large prize winning port 265 so as to block the first large prize winning port 265 from the front. 271 is placed at the guiding position, the portion on the first guiding plate 271 that does not hinder the flow of game balls toward the first big winning hole 265 or the first through gate 263 is the first guiding position. It may be configured to be provided on the plate 271 . In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first big winning hole 265 in the situation where the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the blocking position.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric prize winning device 32, and when the opening and closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 However, in this embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided below the special electric prize winning device 32, but two special electric prize winning devices 32 are arranged vertically. is set. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left area PA2 of the game area PA. The game ball entry frequency is constant regardless of the game state. Further, when the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operation port 34 is provided. Therefore, when the shooting operation of the game ball is performed so as to flow down the left side area PA2, it becomes possible to win a prize to the through gate 35, and furthermore, the second operation port 34 opens with the prize winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger. When the state is reached, the winning to the second operation port 34 becomes possible.

By the way, in this embodiment, a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set as support modes for controlling the state of the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34. FIG. In the low frequency support mode, the general electrical role 34a does not open or the frequency of the general electrical role 34a in the open state is relatively low, and in the high frequency support mode, the frequency of the general electrical role 34a in the open state is relatively low. Relatively high. In the case of a low probability result, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low frequency support mode, and in the case of a high probability result, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the high frequency support mode. .

Two special electric prize winning devices 32 are vertically arranged side by side in the right area PA3. These special electric prize winning devices 32 are provided with a passage formation body 201, an opening/closing member 202 and a guide member 203, as in the first embodiment. When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, the game ball cannot enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and passes through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening/closing member 202. , the game ball will flow down below the special electric prize winning device 32 . When the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, a game ball can be placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, and the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 is discharged into the fourth discharge passage. It becomes possible to enter the ball into the part 45 . In the following description, the upper special electric prize winning device 32 is called a first special electric prize winning device 291 , and the lower special electric prize winning device 32 is called a second special electric prize winning device 292 .

The first special electric prize winning device 291 extends above the second special electric prize winning device 292 from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA. A guide nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the first special electric prize winning device 291 in the right area PA3, as in the first embodiment. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the first special electric prize winning device 291 by the guiding nail group 241 . Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end portion of the opening/closing member 202 . In this case, when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 is arranged at the open position and the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the open state, the game ball flowing into the right area PA3 is the first When the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric prize-winning device 291 is arranged at the closed position and the first special electric prize-winning device 291 is in the closed state. , the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is allowed to flow down below the first special electric prize winning device 291 .

The second special electric prize winning device 292 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the game area PA. A lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 in the right area PA3. The lower guide nail group 293 guides the game balls that have flowed into the lower part of the first special electric prize winning device 291 to the right end side of the second special electric prize winning device 292, from the passage formation body 201 side of the first special electric prize winning device 291 to the second It is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b downward to the right over the right end side of the 2 special electric prize winning device 292 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed below the first special electric prize winning device 291 is guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the second special electric prize winning device 292 by the lower guide nail group 293 . Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end portion of the opening/closing member 202 . In this case, when the opening/closing member 202 of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is arranged at the open position and the second special electric prize winning device 292 is in the open state, the game ball flowing into the right area PA3 When the opening/closing member 202 of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is arranged at the closed position and the second special electric prize winning device 292 is in the closed state , the game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 is allowed to flow down below the second special electric prize winning device 292 .

FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing the opening setting process for the special electric which is executed by the main side CPU 63. FIG. The opening setting process for the special electric is executed in step S1608 of the special electric start processing (FIG. 42) and step S1810 of the special electric closing processing (FIG. 44).

In the opening setting process for the special electric, the opening setting process of the first special electric winning device 291 is first executed (step S4101). In the open setting process, data setting is performed so that the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the open state. In addition, subsequently, the opening setting processing of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is executed (step S4102). In the open setting process, data setting is performed so that the second special electric prize winning device 292 is in the open state. As a result, the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are opened at the same time or substantially at the same time. That is, in the present embodiment, at the start of each round game in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big hit, at the start of each opening of the special electric prize winning device 291, 292 in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of the small hit At the start, both the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are in an open state.

FIG. 85(b) is a flow chart showing the closing setting process for the special train executed by the main side CPU 63. FIG. Note that the closing setting process for the special electric is executed in step S1704 of the special electric open processing (FIG. 43).

In the closing setting process for the special electric, the closing setting process of the first special electric winning device 291 is executed first (step S4201). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in a closed state. In addition, the closing setting processing of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is subsequently executed (step S4202). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the second special electric prize winning device 292 is in a closed state. As a result, the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are closed at the same time or substantially at the same time. That is, in the present embodiment, at the end of each round game in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big hit, at the end of each round game, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the result of the small hit, each opening time of the special electric winning device 291, 292 At the end, both the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are closed.

By the way, although the explanation by illustration is omitted, in the special electric prize during processing (FIG. 43), if the game ball has won in either the first special electric prize winning device 291 or the second special electric prize winning device 292, in step S1706 make an affirmative judgment. In this case, if the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are winning at the same time, 2 is subtracted from the value of the prize winning counter in step S1707, and one of them wins. If so, 1 is subtracted from the winning counter value in step S1707. In addition, in the special electric closed process (FIG. 44), if the result is a small hit and the game ball has won in either the first special electric winning device 291 or the second special electric winning device 292, the process proceeds to step S1801. make an affirmative decision. In this case, if the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are winning at the same time, 2 is subtracted from the value of the prize winning counter in step S1802, and either one of them wins. If so, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802.

Next, how the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are opened and closed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 86(a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 86(b) shows the period during which the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the open state, and FIG. 86(c) shows the second special electric prize winning device 292 FIG. 86(d) shows the period of the open state, and FIG. 86(d) shows the time until the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 reaches the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric winning device 292. Indicates the shortest period assumed as the required period.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the round game is executed at each of timing t1 to timing t2, timing t3 to timing t5, and timing t6 to t8. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 86(c), both the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are activated at the timing of t1, the timing of t3, and the timing of t6, respectively. It will be in an open state, and both the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 will be in a closed state at the timing of t2, the timing of t5, and the timing of t8.

In this configuration, it is assumed that the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 at the timing of t2 and the timing of t5 when the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the closed state. be done. This game ball falls downward without winning the first special electric prize winning device 291 . In this case, each special electric The distance between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 is set so that the period is longer than the interval period between one opening time and the next opening time of the prize winning devices 291, 292. It is In addition, as already explained, a lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292, and the game ball that has flowed below the first special electric prize winning device 291 It reaches the position of the second special electric prize winning device 292 by descending the slope on the lower guide nail group 293 by its own weight. As a result, the period required for the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 to reach the guide plate portion 214 of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is longer than when the game ball falls vertically. It has been extended.

With the above configuration, the game ball dropped from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 toward the second special electric prize winning device 292 at the timing of t2 is shown in FIGS. As shown, the second special electric prize winning device 292 is reached at the timing t4, which is the timing after the timing t3 at which the second special electric prize winning device 292 is opened again. Also, the game ball dropped from the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 toward the second special electric prize winning device 292 at the timing of t5, as shown in FIGS. The second special electric prize winning device 292 is reached at the timing t7, which is the timing after the timing t6 when the second special electric prize winning device 292 is opened again.

When the first special electric prize winning device 291 is closed in each round game, the maximum number of game balls placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 is about two which is smaller than the winning upper limit number. . Therefore, the second special electric prize winning device 292 will not be closed before the game ball dropped from the first special electric prize winning device 291 wins the second special electric prize winning device 292 .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are vertically arranged side by side in the right area PA3, the first special electric prize winning device 291 is displayed at each opening time in the opening/closing execution mode. and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are both open. As a result, the game ball that fails to enter the first special electric prize winning device 291 in the open state can enter the second special electric prize winning device 292 in the open state. Therefore, in the open/close execution mode, it becomes difficult for the balls to leak to the special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292.

A game ball that could not enter the first special electric prize winning device 291 even though it reached the position of the first special electric prize winning device 291 at the timing when each open round ends, is released in the next open round. The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are provided so that the ball can be won in the second special electric prize winning device 292 . As a result, a game ball that has leaked into the first special electric prize winning device 291 in a predetermined open round can enter the second special electric prize winning device 292 in the next open round. It becomes difficult for ball leakage to 292 to occur.

The game ball reaches the position of the second special electric prize winning device 292 from the position of the first special electric prize winning device 291 in the period from the end of the predetermined opening round to the start of the next opening round in one opening and closing execution mode. The period is set to be shorter than the period required to As a result, a game ball that has leaked into the first special electric prize winning device 291 in a predetermined open round can enter the second special electric prize winning device 292 in the next open round. In addition, it is possible to realize a configuration for making it difficult to generate such an incoming ball omission by adjusting the positional relationship between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 .

In the configuration as described above, when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric prize winning device 291 is arranged at the open position, the inflow of game balls to the downstream side of the opening/closing member 202 is prevented, and the second special electric prize winning is prevented. When the opening/closing member 202 of the device 292 is arranged at the open position, the inflow of game balls to the downstream side of the opening/closing member 202 is blocked. Then, when each open round is started, the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are simultaneously opened, and when each open round ends, the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize device The winning device 292 is closed at the same time. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls discharged to the outlet 24a without winning the special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292 in the opening/closing execution mode.

The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are opened at the same time and closed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing an increase in the processing load for controlling the opening and closing of these special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292 .

<Another form of the sixteenth embodiment>
・The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are not limited to being in the open state at the same time at the start of each opening round, but the timing to be in the open state is slightly different, but they are distinguished by appearance. The configuration may be substantially the same to the extent that it is difficult to do so, or the configuration may be such that the opening timing is different to the extent that it is visually distinguishable. In this configuration, in order to allow the game ball that has leaked into the first special electric prize winning device 291 to enter the second special electric prize winning device 292, the timing when the second special electric prize winning device 292 is in the open state is the first special electric prize winning device. It is preferable that it is earlier than the timing when the device 291 is in the open state.

・The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are not limited to being in the closed state at the same time at the end of each opening round. The configuration may be substantially the same to the extent that it is difficult to do so, or the configuration may be such that the timing of the closed state is different to the extent that it is visually distinguishable.

When the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 may be reliably prevented from flowing downstream from the first special electric prize winning device 291. - 特許庁For example, the opening/closing member 202 has a plate shape without an opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271 and 281 in the fifteenth embodiment. 24, and when the game board 24 is located at the open position, the opening/closing member 202 may extend from the board surface of the game board 24 to the window panel 52. - 特許庁As a result, when the first special electric prize winning device 291 is in the open state, except for the game ball placed on the opening and closing member 202 at the timing when the first special electric prize winning device 291 switches from the open state to the closed state, The game ball flowing down the area PA3 will surely win the first special electric prize winning device 291.例文帳に追加

In addition to or instead of the configuration, when the second special electric prize winning device 292 is in the open state, it is certain that the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 flows downstream from the second special electric prize winning device 292. It is good also as a structure blocked by. For example, the opening/closing member 202 has a plate shape without an opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271 and 281 in the fifteenth embodiment. 24, and when the game board 24 is located at the open position, the opening/closing member 202 may extend from the board surface of the game board 24 to the window panel 52. - 特許庁As a result, when the second special electric prize winning device 292 is in the open state, except for the game ball placed on the opening and closing member 202 at the timing when the second special electric prize winning device 292 switches from the open state to the closed state The game ball flowing down the area PA3 will surely win the second special electric prize winning device 292.例文帳に追加

・It is not limited to the configuration in which the lower guide peg group 293 is provided between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292, and the lower guide peg group 293 is not provided. may be configured. Even in this case, the distance between the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 is such that the game ball reaches the position of the second special electric prize winning device 292 from the position of the first special electric prize winning device 291. By setting the shortest period required to the time to be longer than the interval period between the opening times of the special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292, the game balls that have leaked into the first special electric prize winning device 291 are replaced with the second It becomes possible to make the ball enter the special electric prize winning device 292 .

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the sixteenth embodiment in the configuration for making all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 win the special electric prize winning device in the opening/closing execution mode. The different configurations will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixteenth embodiment is basically omitted. In addition, there is no small winning result in this embodiment.

FIG. 87 is a longitudinal sectional view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the special electric winning devices 301 and 302 in this embodiment.

A first special electric prize winning device 301 and a second special electric prize winning device 302 are vertically arranged side by side in the right area PA3 of the game board 24 . Each of the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 is provided with large prize winning openings 301a and 302a into which game balls can enter, and is provided with opening/closing doors 301b and 302b for opening and closing the special prize winning openings 301a and 302a. The opening/closing doors 301b and 302b can be switched between an open position and a closed position by being driven by drive units 301c and 302c for special electric trains. When the opening/closing doors 301b and 302b are arranged at the closed position, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the big winning openings 301a and 302a, and the opening/closing doors 301b and 302b are arranged at the open position, thereby winning the big prize. A game ball can enter the openings 301a and 302a. Game balls entering the big winning openings 301a and 302a are detected by detection sensors 301d and 302d. In this embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment, both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously opened at the start of the round game, and the first special electric prize device 302 is opened at the end of the round game. Both the winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are closed at the same time.

Although illustration is omitted in this embodiment, when the first special electric prize winning device 301 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 is ensured to win the first special electric prize winning device 301. An area upstream of the first special electric prize winning device 301 is set in the right area PA3. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower side of the first special electric prize winning device 301 is placed in the right area so as to surely win the second special electric prize winning device 302 when the second special electric prize winning device 302 is in an open state at that time. An area between the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 is set in PA3.

A flow blocking member 303 is provided between the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 in the right area PA3. The flow prevention member 303 is driven by the prevention drive unit 304 to be movable between a retracted position that does not protrude forward from the board surface of the game board 24 and a blocking position that projects forward from the board surface of the game board 24. ing. When the flow prevention member 303 is arranged at the retracted position, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower side of the first special electric prize winning device 301 moves toward the second special electric prize winning device 302 without being hindered by the flow prevention member 303. and flow down. On the other hand, when the flow prevention member 303 is arranged at the blocking position, all the game balls that have flowed downward of the first special electric prize winning device 301 are placed on the upper surface of the flow prevention member 303, and the second special electric prize winning device 302 flow to the side is prevented.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the flow prevention control process executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. Note that the flow prevention control process is repeatedly executed in the opening/closing execution mode.

When the current round game is a round game different from the final round game (step S4301: YES), and the inhibition start period (specifically, 2 seconds) has passed since the start timing of the current round game (Step S4302: YES), drive control processing for starting blocking is executed (step S4303). As a result, the flow blocking member 303 is arranged from the retracted position to the blocking position. In addition, the blocking start period is set to a period shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball (specifically 0.6 seconds) and the winning upper limit number of each round game (specifically 10). , the round game will not end before the inhibition start period elapses.

When the negative determination is made in step S4301, when the negative determination is made in step S4302, or when the process of step S4303 is executed, the blocking end period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the round game. (step S4304). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4304, drive control processing for ending blocking is executed (step S4305). As a result, the flow blocking member 303 is moved from the blocking position to the retracted position. The blocking end period is set to be shorter than the blocking start period.

Next, the relationship between the open/closed states of the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 and the operating position of the flow prevention member 303 will be described. FIG. 89 is a time chart for explaining this relationship. FIG. 89(a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 89(b) shows the period during which the first special electric prize winning device 301 is in the open state, and FIG. 89(c) shows the second special electric prize winning device 302 FIG. 89(d) shows the period in which the flow blocking member 303 is in the blocking position. 90(a) to 90(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the open/closed states of the special electric winning devices 301 and 302 and the operating position of the flow prevention member 303. FIG. In addition, the case of the opening and closing execution mode in which the round game occurs three times will be described.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the first round game is executed at the timing of t1. At the timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in the open state as shown in FIG.

At timing t2 when the blocking start period has elapsed from timing t1 when the first round game is started, the flow-down blocking member 303 is moved from the retracted position to the blocking position as shown in FIG. 89(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(a), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow blocking member 303 is arranged at the blocking position.

After that, at the timing of t3, the first round game ends as shown in FIG. 89(a). At the timing t3, as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. However, even in this situation, the flow blocking member 303 is maintained at the blocking position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90(b), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in the closed state, and the flow blocking member 303 is arranged at the blocking position. As a result, the game ball passing in front of the first special electric prize winning device 301 at the timing when the first special electric prize winning device 301 is closed or the game ball passing in front of the first special electric prize winning device 301 during the interval period flows down. Further flow down is prevented while being placed on the upper surface of the blocking member 303 .

After that, at the timing of t4, the next round game is started as shown in FIG. The device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(a), both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in the open state, and the flow blocking member 303 is arranged at the blocking position.

After that, after the round game is started at the timing of t5, the blocking end period elapses, and the flow-down blocking member 303 is arranged from the blocking position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 89(d). In this case, both the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are in the open state as shown in FIG. As a result, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the flow blocking member 303 start to flow downward, and all the game balls win the second special electric prize winning device 302.例文帳に追加

After that, the same operation as that of timing t2 to timing t5 is repeated at timing t6 to timing t9. Then, at the timing of t10, the final round game ends as shown in FIG. 89(a). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. Further, as shown in FIG. 89(d), the flow prevention member 303 is arranged at the retracted position.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if a ball leaks into the first special electric prize winning device 301 , the leaked game ball is prevented from flowing downstream by the flow blocking member 303 . Then, under the condition that the second special electric prize winning device 302 is in an open state, the blocking by the flow blocking member 303 is canceled, so that the game ball that has been blocked from flowing downstream by the flow blocking member 303 is released. The ball will land in the second special electric prize winning device 302 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball leakage to the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 in the open/close execution mode.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the position where the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided. In addition, a ball-entering portion that triggers acquisition of holding information on the normal map side is provided in addition to the through gate 35 . The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 91 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA, but in this embodiment, the special electric winning apparatus 32 and the through gate 35 are provided in the left area PA2 of the game area PA. A combination with a through gate 35 is provided. The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the same as that of the first embodiment except that the left and right positional relationships are reversed. That is, the special electric prize winning device 32 extends from the left end of the left side area PA2 to the left end of the center frame 36a in the middle of the left side area PA2 in the vertical direction, and the passage forming body in which the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is formed. Reference numeral 201 is provided on the left frame portion 36d of the center frame 36a, and the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 is present at the left end of the left area PA2. The upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 slopes down toward the right. The game balls flowing down the left side area PA2 reach the area where the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided, except for the game balls entering the entrance portion 36e of the warp passage.

A guide nail group 241 is provided above the special electric prize winning device 32 in the left area PA2 by arranging a plurality of nails 24b. The guide nail group 241 guides the game ball to the receiving part 231 which flows into the left area PA2 and does not enter the entrance part 36e of the warp passage. As a result, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 and reaching the special electric prize winning device 32 is first guided to the receiving portion 231 and then reaches the left end of the opening/closing member 202 . Then, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the open position, the player can enter the fourth discharge passage portion 45 by moving the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 downward toward the right. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 202 is arranged at the closed position, the liquid flows down below the opening/closing member 202 through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) of the opening/closing member 202 . In addition, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball rests on the guiding plate portion 214, the game ball flows downward from the resting position of the opening/closing member 202.例文帳に追加

A through gate 35 is provided at a position below the special electric prize winning device 32 and near the center frame 36a in the left area PA2. Also, between the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35, a control nail group 242 is provided for guiding the game ball existing in a predetermined range on the right side of the guiding plate portion 214 to the through gate 35. . As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball exists in a predetermined range on the right side of the guiding plate part 214, the game ball enters the through gate 35. becomes. Then, as in the first embodiment, by the occurrence of a prize to the through gate 35, on the condition that the upper limit number of reservation information on the side of the general pattern is not stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c. side pending information is obtained.

In this embodiment, an emergency gate 311 is provided in addition to the through gate 35 as a ball-entering portion that triggers acquisition of holding information on the normal map side. The sudden gate 311 is provided above the guide nail group 241 in the left area PA2. When winning to the emergency gate 311 occurs, similarly to the case of winning to the through gate 35, the upper limit number of holding information on the normal drawing side is not retained and stored in the normal drawing retaining area 65c. As a condition, the reservation information on the general map side is acquired. In addition, the sudden gate 311 has a vertically penetrating gate similar to the through gate 35, and the winning game ball continues to flow down the game area PA as it is, but it is not limited to this. A game ball that has entered the gate 311 for sudden play may be ejected to the back side of the game board 24 without any trouble.

Here, a restriction peg 312 is provided on the upstream side of the sudden gate 311 to make it difficult for the game to enter the sudden gate 311 . Due to the provision of the limiting nail 312, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 enters the emergency gate 311 is the probability that the game ball supplied to the lower side area PA4 enters the first operation port 33. has a lower probability than In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will enter the emergency gate 311 is lower than the probability that the game ball flowing down below the special electric prize winning device 32 in the left side area PA2 will enter the general winning hole 31. It's becoming Further, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will win the emergency gate 311 is lower than the probability that the game ball will win the special electric prize winning device 32 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state. In addition, the probability is lower than the probability that the game ball wins the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode. In addition, the probability that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will enter the sudden gate 311 is higher than the probability that the game ball will enter the second operating port 34 when the second operating port 34 is in the open state. low probability. For example, when 1000 game balls have flowed into the left area PA2, the probability is that one game ball can enter the gate 311 for breakthrough.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the hold information on the general map side is acquired, the general electric open state is reliably generated with the hold information on the general map side as a trigger. In other words, when winning to the through gate 35 or the emergency gate 311 occurs and the holding information on the normal drawing side is acquired, the second operating port 34 is surely opened after that. Thereby, it becomes possible to heighten the degree of advantage with respect to the acquisition of the hold information on the general map side.

Even in the configuration in which the special electric prize winning device 32, the through gate 35 and the sudden gate 311 are provided in the left side area PA2 as described above, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 is provided with the condition that the special electric prize winning device 32 does not win. and flows into the lower area PA4. Then, the game ball that has flowed into the lower area PA4 can reach the position where the first operation opening 33 can be won, and if the second operation opening 34 is in an open state, the second operation opening 34 is won. possible positions can be reached. In addition, it is possible to reach a position where a prize can be won in the general prize opening 31 . As a result, by continuing the shooting operation of the game ball so as to flow down the left area PA2, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the through gate 35 and the sudden opening It is possible to aim for winning for all of the gates 311 .

On the other hand, the right side area PA3 is provided with the nail 24b but is not provided with the ball entry portion. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 flows into the lower side area PA4, and the game ball that has flowed in can reach the position where the first operation opening 33 can win, and the second operation opening 34 is in an open state. If so, the player can reach the second operation opening 34 at a winning position. In this case, because of the fact that the ball entry portion is not provided in the right side area PA3 as described above, the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the right side area PA3 rather than the case where the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left side area PA2. is more likely to result in a winning to the second operating port 34 which is in the open state. As a result, for example, when a winning to the emergency gate 311 occurs and the open state of the second operation port 34 suddenly occurs, by performing the shooting operation of the game ball so as to flow down the right area PA3, the second It is possible to make it easier to generate a winning to the second operation port 34. - 特許庁

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the acquisition processing of the reservation information on the normal side, which is executed by the main side CPU 63 . In addition, the acquisition process of the reservation information on the general map side is performed in step S1101 in the general map general electric control process (FIG. 37).

Winning to the through gate 35 has occurred (step S4401: YES), further when the number of reservation information on the general pattern side stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number (step S4402: YES ), in order for the main side CPU 63 to grasp the number of unprocessed general pattern side reservation information stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c, add 1 to the value of the general pattern reservation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (Step S4403). By the way, according to the value of the general pattern reservation counter, the display contents of the general pattern reservation display section 38b in the general pattern unit 38 are adjusted. As a result, the display content of the normal map reserve display unit 38b corresponds to the number of the reserve information on the normal map side stored in the normal map reserve area 65c. After that, the value of the general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the first memory area of the general electric drawing reservation area 65c, that is, the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step S4403 (step S4404).

After that, it transmits the general map hold command to the sound emission control device 81 (step S4405). When the voice light emission control device 81 receives the general map hold command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . In the pattern display device 41, an image display is performed to notify the number of the reserved information on the general pattern side stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c, and the display control device 82 issues a command corresponding to the general pattern reservation command. By receiving it, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase of one in the number of pieces of reserved information on the normal map side. In addition, when the variable display of the pattern in the normal map display section 38a is started triggered by the reserved information on the normal map side, the content of the image display corresponds to the number of reserved information on the normal map side being reduced by one. updated.

The display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. 93(a). In the lower edge of the display surface of the pattern display device 41, a first reservation display area 313 for notifying the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85, and a second special figure A second pending display area 314 for notifying the number of second pending information stored in the pending area 86 is set. In the first reservation display area 313, the same number of unit display areas as the number of first reservation information that can be stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the number of the first reservation information increases. Accordingly, pending images 315 are displayed sequentially from the left unit display area, and pending images 315 are erased sequentially from the right unit display area as the number of first pending information decreases. In addition, in the second reservation display area 314, the same number of unit display areas as the number of second reservation information that can be stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the number of second reservation information is The pending images 315 are displayed sequentially from the left unit display area as the number increases, and the pending images 315 are erased sequentially from the right unit display area as the number of the second pending information decreases. Since the first reserved display area 313 is set, the number of the first reserved information can be clearly grasped through the display contents of the pattern display device 41, and the second reserved display area 314 is set. Therefore, the number of pieces of the second pending information can be clearly grasped through the display contents of the pattern display device 41 .

In the upper left corner of the display surface of the pattern display device 41, a normal pattern reservation display area 316 for notifying the number of reserved information on the general pattern side stored in the normal pattern reservation area 65c is set. there is In the normal map reservation display area 316, the same number of unit display areas as the number of reservation information on the general map side that can be stored in the general map reservation area 65c are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the number of reservation information on the general map side is The reserved images 315 are displayed sequentially from the left unit display area as the number increases, and the reserved images 315 are erased sequentially from the right unit display area as the number of reserved information on the normal drawing side decreases. By setting the normal pattern reserved display area 316, it is possible to clearly grasp the number of reserved information on the normal pattern side through the display contents of the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

In addition, the display control device 82 increases the number of pending images 315 to be displayed in the normal pattern pending display area 316 by one when a command corresponding to the normal pattern pending command is received. In addition, the display control device 82 transmits from the audio emission control device 81 based on the fact that a command indicating that the variable display of the pattern in the general pattern display unit 38a has started is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the audio emission control device 81 The number of reserved images 315 displayed in the normal drawing reserved display area 316 is decreased by one when the command to be displayed is received.

Returning to the explanation of the acquisition processing of the reservation information on the general map side (FIG. 92), if the negative determination is made in step S4401, if the negative determination is made in step S4402, or if the processing of step S4405 is executed, Winning to the emergency gate 311 has occurred (step S4406: YES), further on the condition that the number of reservation information on the general pattern side stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number ( Step S4407: YES), 1 is added to the value of the general pattern reservation counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S4408). As already explained, according to the value of the general pattern reservation counter, the display contents of the general pattern reservation display section 38b in the general pattern unit 38 are adjusted. After that, the value of the general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the general pattern reservation area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S4408 (step S4409).

After that, if the current situation is the opening and closing execution mode (step S4410: YES), or if the value of the normal pattern reservation counter of the main side RAM 65 is 2 or more although it is not the opening and closing execution mode, that is, the normal pattern reservation area 65c When two or more pieces of hold information on the side are stored (step S4410 and step S4411: NO), the general map hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S4412). The processing contents of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 in this case are the same as in the case of transmitting the general map hold command in step S4405.

On the other hand, if the current state is not the open/close execution mode (step S4410: NO), and the value of the general pattern reserve counter in the main side RAM 65 is "1", that is, the general pattern reserve information is 1 in the general pattern reserve area 65c. If only one is stored (step S4411: YES), an unexpected hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 (step S4413). When the sound emission control device 81 receives the sudden hold command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the command, it updates the display contents of the normal pattern pending display area 316 in the same manner as when the command corresponding to the normal pattern pending command is received. Further, when the display control device 82 receives a command corresponding to the sudden command, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. A special notification image 317 is displayed to prompt the user to perform a shooting operation aimed at the . By displaying the special notification image 317, the player performs a shooting operation aiming at winning a prize to the second operation opening 34, and it is possible to generate an opportunity to acquire the second hold information.

When the timing for displaying the special notification image 317 comes when the display control device 82 is executing the effect for the game round on the pattern display device 41, the display control device 82 displays a A reduced display area 318 is set, and in the reduced display area 318, the effect for the game cycle is continued in a state of being reduced and displayed. As a result, even when a sudden hold command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 while the effect for the game round is being executed, the special notification image 317 can be displayed in a predetermined size. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the notification image 317 .

Next, how the hold information on the general map side is acquired will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 94 . FIG. 94(a) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, FIG. 94(b) shows the period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, and FIG. 94(c) shows the occurrence of the prize to the through gate 35 FIG. 94(d) shows the timing of winning a prize to the emergency gate 311, and FIG. 94(e) shows the timing of acquisition of hold information on the normal side.

At timing t1 when the opening/closing execution mode is not executed, as shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94(e), the hold information on the normal map side is acquired at the timing of t1. Triggered by this acquired hold information on the normal side, the second operation port 34 becomes an open state, and the second hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operation port 34 in this open state is the game round. The opening and closing execution mode triggered by the second small hit result is executed over the timing of t2 to the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. . Here, in the present embodiment, when the result of the second small win is obtained, the number of openings of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set to two.

In the open/close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94(b), the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state over the timings t3 to t4 and t6 to t7. In this case, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with the game ball resting on the guide plate portion 214 at timing t4 and timing t7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94(c), winning to the through gate 35 occurs at timings t5 and t8, respectively, and at timings t5 and t8, as shown in FIG. , the hold information on the general map side is acquired. As a result, the opportunity to open the second operation port 34 again occurs, and the winning of the second operation port 34 in the open state occurs, and the second reservation information is acquired. As shown in (a), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the second small hit occurs again over the timing of t10 to the timing of t16.

In the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 94(b), the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state over the timing of t11 to the timing of t12 and the timing of t13 to the timing of t14. Further, at the timing of t14, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball rests on the guide plate portion 214. As shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94(c), winning to the through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t15, and the hold information on the normal side is obtained at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 94(e). As a result, the opportunity to open the second working port 34 again occurs, and the second holding information is acquired by winning the second working port 34 in the open state. occurs.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the first embodiment.

Even in a situation where the open/close execution mode is not in effect, a game ball enters the emergency gate 311 so that the reservation information on the normal drawing side is acquired and the second operation port 34 can be opened. Then, when the game ball enters the second operation port 34 which is in the open state, the game moves to the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode is generated not only in the opening/closing execution mode but also in the opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the second operation opening 34 .

A limiting nail 312 is provided upstream of the sudden gate 311 so that the probability of a game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of a game ball entering the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. ing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the probability of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the emergency gate 311 in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the emergency gate 311 in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, a limiting peg 312 is provided so that the probability of a game ball entering the gate 311 for sudden operation is lower than the probability of a game ball entering the first operating port 33. - 特許庁From this point as well, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of the game ball into the emergency gate 311 in the situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect.

When the second operation opening 34 becomes an open state by acquiring the holding information on the general pattern side due to the entry of the game ball to the sudden gate 311, the special notification image 317 corresponding to it is displayed on the pattern display device. 41. As a result, even though the game ball entered the sudden gate 311 and the second operation port 34 was opened, the game ball entered the second operation port 34 without noticing it. It is possible to make it difficult for the phenomenon of losing the ball opportunity to occur.

Since it is possible for a game ball to enter the through gate 35 in the opening and closing execution mode, it is highly likely that the player is conscious of opening the second operation opening 34, but in the opening and closing execution mode In a situation where there is no game ball entering the through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player's awareness of the opening state of the second operation opening 34 is low. In this case, the special notification image 317 is displayed when the game ball enters the emergency gate 311 in a situation other than the open/close execution mode and the hold information on the general map side is acquired. It is possible to direct the player's awareness to the fact that the operating port 34 is in the open state. In addition, the special notification image 317 is not displayed in the opening/closing execution mode in which the player is likely to be conscious of the opening of the second operation port 34, so that the special notification image 317 is displayed. can be prevented from becoming troublesome for the player.

A special notification image 317 is displayed when the reservation information on the normal side is acquired based on the entrance of the game ball to the emergency gate 311 in the situation where the reservation information on the side of the normal side is not acquired. As a result, it is possible to display the special notification image 317 in a situation where the player is less aware of the opening of the second operation port 34 .

A special electric prize winning device 32, a through gate 35, and a sudden gate 311 are provided in the area into which the game ball that flows down or the game ball that has flowed down can enter the left side area PA2. As a result, it becomes possible to aim for winning the special electric prize winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the emergency gate 311 by the same shooting operation mode.

A game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is easier to reach the position of the second operation opening 34 than a game ball flowing down the left side area PA2. As a result, when the second operation port 34 is in an open state in a situation that is not the open/close execution mode, the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right area PA3, thereby allowing the game to the second operation port 34. It is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball.

<Another Form of the Eighteenth Embodiment>
The combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 and the emergency gate 311 may be set in a positional relationship such that if one prize is aimed, the other prize cannot be aimed. For example, the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 may be provided in the left area PA2 and the emergency gate 311 may be provided in the right side area PA3. may be provided in the right area PA3 and the sudden gate 311 may be provided in the left area PA2.

・A general electric open lottery process is executed in the same way as in the first embodiment for the reservation information on the general electric map side, and if the electric electric open state is won, the electric electric open state is entered and the second operation port 34 is opened. It may be configured to be in a state. In this case, even if a game ball enters the sudden gate 311, a situation may occur in which the second operating port 34 is not opened. In the configuration, holding information on the normal side obtained based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and holding information on the normal side obtained based on the game ball entering the emergency gate 311 , and may be configured such that the probability of winning a general electric open state election in the general electric open lottery process is different between the former general electric map side reservation information and the latter general electric drawing side reservation information.

For example, the holding information on the normal side acquired based on the game ball entering the gate 311 for sudden is more general than the holding information on the normal side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is easy to win the general power open state in the power open lottery process. This makes it possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 .

On the other hand, the holding information on the normal side obtained based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is higher than the holding information on the normal side obtained based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 A configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to win the general power open state in the general power open lottery process. In this case, since the probability of the game ball entering the emergency gate 311 being in the open state is low, the probability of the game ball entering the emergency gate 311 need not be lowered.

・Distinguish between the holding information on the normal side that is acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and the holding information on the normal side that is acquired based on the game ball entering the emergency gate 311. In addition to being treated separately, one of these pieces of holding information will be in the general power open state without executing the general power open lottery process, and the other will be in the general power open state winning in the general power open lottery process. As a result, the second operation port 34 may be configured to be in the normal voltage open state. For example, the second operation port 34 is in the general electricity open state without executing the general electricity open lottery process for the reservation information on the general pattern side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311. , Regarding the hold information on the normal diagram side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35, the second operation port 34 is normal electric open by winning the normal electric open state in the electric open lottery process It may be configured to be in a state. This makes it possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 .

・The ball entry probability of the emergency gate 311, the ball entry probability of the general winning opening 31, the ball entry probability of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state, the ball entry probability of the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the probability of ball entry into the through gate 35 in the open/close execution mode, for example, the sudden gate 311 has a higher probability of ball entry than the general winning hole 31. may be Further, the sudden gate 311 may have a higher ball-entering probability than the first operating opening 33 .

- Instead of the sudden gate 311, a second sudden actuation opening may be provided. In this case, by not providing an opening/closing member for blocking or allowing entry of the game ball into the second unexpected operation opening, the game to the second unexpected operation opening is not provided. The ball entry probability does not fluctuate according to the game state, and when the game ball enters the second actuation opening for sudden action, it is the same as when the game ball enters the second actuation opening 34. The second pending information is acquired. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode suddenly occurs when the game ball enters the second opening for sudden operation.

In addition, in the configuration, the average variation display period of the game times triggered by the second hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the second actuation port for sudden operation is the game ball in the second actuation port 34 It may be configured to be shorter than the average variation display period of the game times triggered by the second hold information acquired based on the entry of the ball. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the game ball enters the second opening for sudden operation to when the opening/closing execution mode is started.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, instead of the special electric prize winning device 32, a special electric prize winning device 321 is provided. The different configurations will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 95 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

A special electric prize winning device 321 is provided in place of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The special electric prize winning device 321 is provided in the middle of the right side area PA3 in the vertical direction over the entire horizontal direction. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 surely passes through the area where the special electric prize winning device 321 is provided. Further, a through gate 35 is provided at a position below the special electric prize winning device 321 and near the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3.

The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b). 96(a) and 96(b) are sectional views taken along the line AA of FIG. 95. FIG.

A large winning opening 322 is formed in the game board 24 so as to pass through the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the big winning opening 322 is formed is a position near the variable display unit 36 in the right side area PA3. A special electric prize winning device 321 is provided so as to prevent or allow entry of game balls into the big prize winning opening 322 . The special electric prize winning device 321 is provided with a guide plate 323 provided so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction at a position below the big prize winning opening 322 . The guiding plate 323 is driven by a driving means (not shown) so as to be movable in the front-rear direction. The pachinko machine 10 is slid forward from the blocking position and moved between the guide positions where the amount of projection from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximized.

A ball receiving portion 324 is provided above the right end of the guide plate 323 on the game board 24, and a game flowed from the upper area PA1 to the right area PA3 above the special electric winning device 321 in the right area PA3. A guide nail group 241 is provided for guiding all the balls to the ball receiving portion 324 (see FIG. 95). The guide peg group 241 is formed by arranging a plurality of pegs 24b so as to slope downward to the right. All game balls that have flowed into the right area PA3 are guided to the ball receiving portion 324 by the guide nail group 241. FIG. The distance dimension between the front end of the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 slopes downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 flows down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to its own weight.

When the guide plate 323 is located at the blocking position, the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 96(a). Become. At this blocked position, the front end of the guide plate 323 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the front end of the ball receiving portion 324 . Therefore, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 in the situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the ball receiving portion 324 and the window panel 52 and is below the ball receiving portion 324. will fall to In addition, the forward projection dimension of the guide plate 323 arranged at the blocking position from the board surface of the game board 24 is less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball guided by the guide nail group 241 bounces on the ball receiving portion 324 and goes toward the guide plate 323 arranged at the blocking position, the guide plate 323 and the window are not placed on the guide plate 323. It falls below the guide plate 323 through the space between the panel 52 and the panel 52 . Due to the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position, the occurrence of winning to the big winning opening 322 is blocked. In addition, as described above, the through gate 35 is provided at a position near the variable display unit 36, and its position is to the left of the ball receiving portion 324 so that the game ball bounced in the ball receiving portion 324 is difficult to reach. They are separated from each other. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is placed at the blocking position, the winning of the through gate 35 is also blocked.

When the guide plate 323 is placed at the guide position, the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 96(b). Become. At this guidance position, the front end portion of the guide plate 323 is present on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the front end portion of the ball receiving portion 324 . Therefore, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 in the state where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position is placed on the upper surface of the region of the guide plate 323 that protrudes forward from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It will be posted.

Two partition walls 326, 327 are formed on the upper surface of the projecting area 325, which projects toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 when the guiding plate 323 is arranged at the guiding position. is provided. The first partition wall 326 existing on the right side of these partition walls 326 and 327 extends from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position. In this situation, the rear end of the first partition wall 326 and the board surface of the game board 24 are separated by a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second partition wall 327 on the left side extends from the board surface of the game board 24 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position. However, the front end of the second partition wall 327 is located behind the pachinko machine 10 by a size larger than the diameter of the game ball than the front end of the guide plate 323 . In the configuration in which the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 are formed in this manner, the upper surface of the protruding region 325 is inclined downward toward the left as a whole. In addition, the upper surface of the projecting region 325 is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the position of the first partition wall 326 to the left of the ball receiving portion 324, and from the position of the first partition wall 326 to the second partition wall. It slopes downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 up to the position of the partition wall 327, and slopes downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the position of the second partition wall 327 to the position of the big winning opening 322.例文帳に追加In other words, the upper surface of the protruding area 325, while the game ball placed on the upper surface of the protruding area 325 in the situation in which the guide plate 323 is arranged in the guidance position, flows down toward the left, the first partition wall 326 and the game board 24 and the space between the second partition wall 327 and the front end of the guide plate 323.

In addition, since the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball when the guide plate 323 is placed at the guide position, the guide plate 323 is placed at the guide position. The window panel 52 prevents the game ball placed on the upper surface of the protruding area 325 from falling downward from the front end of the guide plate 323 in the arranged state. The left end of the guide plate 323 faces the center frame 36a of the variable display unit 36 at a position close to it, and the distance between the left end of the guide plate 323 and the center frame 36a is the radius of the game ball. is less than Therefore, in a situation where the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guide position, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the protruding area 325 may drop from the left end of the guide plate 323 toward the bottom of the guide plate 323. blocked by frame 36a.

With the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is arranged at the guiding position, the game ball flows down the projecting area 325 by its own weight along the meandering path on the projecting area 325, and the game ball wins a large prize. The ball will enter the mouth 322 . A game ball that has entered the big winning hole 322 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the big winning hole 322 . This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a prize in the big prize winning opening 322 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the round game or small winning result in which the big winning hole 322 is to be opened, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the big winning hole 322, the main 1 is subtracted from the winning counter value of the side RAM 65 . When the value of the prize winning counter becomes "0", it is specified that the winning of the maximum number of prizes has occurred as in the first embodiment, and the open/close execution mode triggered by the result of the round game or the small win is executed. terminate.

In the situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate 323 arranged at the guide position, when the game ball of the upper limit number of winning prizes enters the big winning opening 322, the guide plate 323 is placed in the state where the game ball is placed. Move from the guiding position to the blocking position. In this case, the game ball placed on the guide plate 323 follows the movement of the guide plate 323 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, moves toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and hits the board surface of the game board 24 from the front. When the guide plate 323 stops supporting the guide plate 323 from below, the guide plate 323 eventually falls downward.

As already explained, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric prize winning device 321, and the position of the through gate 35 is the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 in terms of the lateral positional relationship. It has the same position as the region between In addition, between the special electric prize winning device 321 and the through gate 35, the game ball placed on the inter-section area Y between the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 is allowed to pass through the guide plate 323. A control nail group 242 is provided for guiding the falling game ball toward the through gate 35 so that it will enter the through gate 35 when it falls as it moves from the position to the blocking position (see FIG. 95). . As a result, when the guide plate 323 moves from the allowable position to the blocking position in a situation where the game ball is placed on the inter-section area Y, the winning of the through gate 35 occurs. Incidentally, the inter-section area Y is spaced leftward from the ball receiving portion 324 by a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball, more specifically, by a dimension larger than three times the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving portion 324 is prevented from entering the through gate 35 when the guide plate 323 is arranged at the blocking position.

A game ball that has entered the through gate 35 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the through gate 35 . This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not the through gate 35 has won a prize based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the through gate 35, on the condition that the upper limit number of reservation information on the side of the general pattern is not stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c, the general electric random number counter The numerical information of C4 is stored in the general pattern reservation area 65c as the general pattern reservation information.

Here, when the game ball is shot with the shortest shooting cycle (specifically 0.6 seconds) in the same shooting mode in which the game ball flows down the right area PA3, the guide plate 323 is at the guide position. The area Y position is set. As a result, in the situation where the game ball is placed on the guide plate 323 arranged at the guide position, when the game ball of the winning upper limit number of the big winning opening 322 is entered, the game ball was placed on the guide plate 323. A game ball becomes easy to enter a through gate 35.例文帳に追加

In addition, a meandering passage that not only extends in the lateral direction but also meanders in the front-rear direction is formed in the protruding region 325 of the guide plate 323, and the inter-section region Y is located upstream of the large winning opening 322 in this meandering passage. is set. As a result, it is possible to set the inter-section area Y that makes it easier to win a prize through the through gate 35 while suppressing an increase in the lateral dimension of the guide plate 323 .

<Another Form of the Nineteenth Embodiment>
・Both the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment and the combination of the special electric prize winning device 321 and the through gate 35 in the nineteenth embodiment are provided. It may be configured such that the types of the special electric winning devices 32 and 321 to be subjected to the opening/closing control are changed according to the type of game result obtained. In this case, when the special electric prize winning device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment is the execution target of the opening/closing control, the special electric prize winning device 32 in the first embodiment is the execution target of the opening/closing control. Therefore, the player expects that the special electric prize winning device 321 in the 19th embodiment will be subject to execution of opening/closing control.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, all of the out-port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are configured to store the history information (or ball-entering history). However, it is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is the object of storing the history information. It is good also as a structure which has become. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. It's okay. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the manner in which game balls enter the ball-entering portion for which the history information is stored during a predetermined period.

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the information corresponding to the game ball entry result is transmitted in association with the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. Although the signal paths 118a to 118c are set for the same type of ball-entering unit, the information corresponding to the ball-entering result for the same type of ball-entering unit is not limited to this. , and a plurality of ball-entering detection sensors corresponding thereto, or a configuration in which one type of information is transmitted. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 .

(3) In the first embodiment and the like, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, it is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, there is no need to execute processing for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence information, so the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

(4) Transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o in the first embodiment. However, although it is configured to be performed at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63, it is not limited to this. The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main side CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, it is configured to be stored and held in the correspondence memory 116 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) Transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o in the first embodiment. However, although it is configured to use the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information on the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A dedicated signal path for transmission from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. Thereby, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(6) In the first embodiment, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63 . For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. , the master side CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the sound emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are displayed using the display light emitting part 53, the speaker part 54 and the pattern display device 41. The configuration may be such that the corresponding notification is executed.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the pattern display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to check whether or not the game ball entry state in the game area PA was normal on the business day immediately before the opening of the game hall.

(8) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. may be As a configuration that prevents the game from starting, for example, it may be configured to prohibit the shooting of game balls, or may be configured to disable the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. A configuration may be adopted in which the winning/failure determination process is not executed even if a prize is won to 33 or the second operation opening 34 . Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the RAM erasing switch is turned on. It is good also as operation of the operation means which becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a state where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner.

(9) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main side CPU 63 or the management side CPU 112. may not be executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by the operator of the reading operation. A reading device may be configured to calculate various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main side CPU 63 may be provided with the function of executing the history information storage process and the function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. The CPU 92 may have a configuration, or the audio emission control device 81 may have a configuration. When the payout side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 has these functions, the information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control body having the functions. It will happen.

(11) The management IC 66 is provided with a separate power supply from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 can calculate various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be capable of outputting information of history information or various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

(12) The reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with a reading device, but this is not the only option. Instead, a terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64 . In this case, terminals used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 62 or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 .

(13) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration in which they are provided as nonvolatile storage means such as flash memory. Any one of 116, 117 and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 63 is reduced. The information may be stored and held even if the supply of is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, and backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. good too.

(14) It is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and history information is not stored and held, and a game ball is detected by one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. A configuration may be adopted in which various parameters are calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters increases, it is possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timing.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. , a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66 . Specifically, for the configuration, for example, in the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main side CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the case of the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main side CPU 63, the signal is received. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that point in time when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment. In addition, when an external output opportunity to the readout terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters, which are the calculation results, and also outputs the history information.

(16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, a configuration in which the occurrence of the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is stored as history information. The transition timing to the opening/closing execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information. The occurrence of is stored as history information. Further, by using the history information as described above, a configuration may be employed in which the probability of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, or a configuration in which the probability of transition to the high-frequency support mode is calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, while the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33 and History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to entering a ball into a privilege opportunity ball entering portion that triggers payout of a game ball such as the second operation port 34 and the winning/failure determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball entry part with respect to the total number of discharged game balls while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the privilege opportunity ball entry part. Become.

(19) A configuration may be adopted in which items other than those in each of the above embodiments are included as objects to be left as history information. For example, at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a has become full, the timing at which the full-tank state started, and the timing at which the full-tank state is canceled may be stored as history information. At least one of the no-ball state, the timing at which the no-ball state was started, and the timing at which the no-ball state was canceled may be stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 was in an abnormal state. Alternatively, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the above-described first embodiment and the like, it is assumed in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, it is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. may be configured. In this case, there is no need to set in advance in the management IC 66 the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

(21) The number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open is stored as history information, and the number of entering balls was grasped using the history information. may be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined ball entry portion in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it becomes possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. Also, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurred, and the calculated number of balls entering is an abnormal number. In some cases, an anomaly notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with a fraudulent act of illegally opening the front door frame 14 and entering a game ball into a predetermined ball entering section.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the above first embodiment, etc., the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reversed from that in the above first embodiment. In this case, the order in which the master side CPU 63 executes the processing for changing the output state of each signal and the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing for the buffers 122a to 122o match.

(24) When using the reading terminal 102 to output information stored in the main ROM 64, the configuration may be such that one of the program and data can be selectively output. It is good also as a structure which can externally output only. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. can be considered.

(25) Different information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information or various parameters. may store the history information of the occurrence of the abnormality, and the stored history information may be output to the outside through the reading terminal 102 .

(26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided individually for each of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a Although the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by totaling the number of game balls detected by the above, it is not limited to this, for example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA A passage area through which the game balls pass one by one may be provided, and an ejection detection sensor for detecting the game balls passing through the passage area may be provided. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. In addition, in this configuration, as in the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 By providing 42a to 47a, it becomes possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls entering each ball entry portion to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided on the downstream side of the special electric winning device 32, but a configuration in which an operation port that triggers acquisition of hold information on the special figure side is provided. good too. For example, the general electric accessory 34a is defective, and an operation opening that is not provided with a member that directly prevents or allows the entry of a game ball and is an operation opening that triggers acquisition of the second reservation information is provided. It is good also as a structure with. In this case, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening and closing execution mode, an opportunity to acquire the second hold information is generated. In addition, in the configuration, when the second hold information is subject to the validity determination, the opening and closing execution mode is surely generated, so that when the game ball enters the operation opening in the opening and closing execution mode means that the open/close execution mode will occur without fail. This increases the importance of the game ball entering the operation opening in the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(28) In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided on the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32, so that game balls can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. However, the configuration for providing the ball entry portion that allows the game ball to be entered in the open/close execution mode is not limited to this. For example, the special electric opening/closing member of the special electric prize winning device 32 is configured like the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34, and this special electric opening/closing member is arranged from the closed position to the open position, so that one of the special electric opening/closing members The part presses the ball entry opening/closing member of the predetermined ball entry part, and the ball entry opening/closing member moves from the closed position to the open position, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry part. good too. In this case, when the special electric switching member returns from the open position to the closed position, the pressing of the special electric switching member on the incoming ball opening/closing member is released, and the incoming ball opening/closing member returns from the open position to the closed position. . Even with this configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into a predetermined ball entering portion in the opening/closing execution mode.

(29) Even if the special electric prize winning device 32 is not opened and closed, the game ball can reach the position when the game ball can reach and the shooting operation is performed aiming at the special electric prize winning device 32. A through gate 35 may be provided at a position, and an electric opening/closing member may be provided to prevent or allow a game ball from entering the through gate 35 . Then, when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the electric opening/closing member is in a fixed cycle, and the blocking position for blocking the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35 and the entry of the game ball into the through gate 35 are set. It is configured to move between allowable positions that allow Even with this configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(30) In the above-described first embodiment, when a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the reservation information on the normal diagram side is acquired, the normal electric open state of the second operating port 34 is reliably generated. may be In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(31) In the first embodiment, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the game ball on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35. The configuration is not limited to this, and a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric prize winning device 32 switches from the closed state to the open state. That is, in this configuration, even if the special electric prize winning device 32 is in a closed state, the special electric prize winning device 32 cannot win a prize, but a game ball can be placed on the guide plate portion 214. The game ball can drop toward the through gate 35 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state under the condition that the game ball is put on the gate. In this case, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214, and even when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state, It is possible to increase the attention of the player to the winning device 32 . In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(32) When the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can enter the through gate 35, and the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state. A game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 may enter the through gate 35 when switching to . As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the start timing and end timing of the opening times of the special electric prize winning device 32 . In addition, it is possible to generate many opportunities for game balls to enter the through gate 35 . In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(33) In the first embodiment, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 are reliably prevented from flowing downstream from the special electric prize winning device 32. may be For example, the opening/closing member 202 has a plate shape without an opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271 and 281 in the fifteenth embodiment. 24, and when the game board 24 is located at the open position, the opening/closing member 202 may extend from the board surface of the game board 24 to the window panel 52. - 特許庁As a result, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, except for the game ball placed on the opening and closing member 202 at the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, it flows down the right area PA3. The game ball to be played is surely won by the special electric prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(34) In the above-described first embodiment, when a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the electric power is opened, the second operation opening 34 is electrically opened. For example, when a game ball enters the through gate 35, the second operation port 34 is opened by mechanically interlocking using the pressing force of the entered game ball. When one or two game balls enter the second operation opening 34, the second operation opening 34 returns to the closed state by mechanically interlocking using the pressing force of the game ball. may be In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(35) In the above-described first embodiment, the game ball entering the through gate 35 is configured to continue to flow down the game area PA thereafter. The played game ball may be discharged from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24 . In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(36) The structure of the special electric prize winning device 32 of the first embodiment and the structure of the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 of the fifteenth embodiment are applied to the second operation port 34, and the second operation port A predetermined ball entry portion may be provided at a position where the ball can be entered only when the door 34 is opened and closed. In this case, the predetermined ball entry part may be a ball entry part in which the game ball is put out by the game ball entry, and the special figure side reservation information or the normal figure side reservation information is displayed by the game ball entry. It may be a ball entry section from which information is acquired.

(37) In the open/close execution mode, it may be configured such that the holding information on the general map side is not digested. As a result, the transition of the second operating port 34 to the normal open state in response to the acquisition of the hold information on the normal diagram side in the opening and closing execution mode occurs after the opening and closing execution mode ends. It is possible for the player to aim for the entry of the game ball into the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(38) Even in the open/close execution mode, the reserved information on the normal diagram side is digested, but the variable display of the pattern in the normal diagram display section 38a started in the open/close execution mode continues until the open/close execution mode ends. may be configured. Even in this case, it is possible for the player to aim for the game ball to enter the second operation opening 34 after the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(39) It is good also as a structure which can be not only a big-hit result and a small-hit result but a loss result, when 2nd reservation information becomes the object of right or wrong judging processing. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can become a small hit result, even when 1st reservation information becomes the object of a right or wrong determination process.

(40) A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the universal electrical accessory 34a are mutually different. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the situation in which the game ball is continuously shot in the same manner in the game area PA, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high and low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity open state in the general electricity open lottery using the general electricity random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5), but the probability is high. In the frequency support mode, the number of times the general electrical accessory 34a is in the open state when the general electrical open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the open time for one time is set longer. there is In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the general electric open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the The duration of one display on the display section 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to become the electric power open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, in the electric power open lottery A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the electric power open state is increased. In addition, after one general electric open lottery is performed, the time secured for the next general electric open lottery In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, in the high-frequency support mode, it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than in the low-frequency support mode, or is set so that the average reserved time is shorter. good too. In addition, the number of open times is increased, the open time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured after one electric power open lottery is held and the next electric power open lottery is held is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

(41) When the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special electric prize winning device 32, and when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state, the game ball can enter the special electric prize winning device 32. However, even if the special electric prize winning device 32 is in a closed state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32, but it is in an open state. A configuration may be adopted in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the special electric prize winning device 32 than in the case. In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(42) When the second operating port 34 is open, the game ball can enter the second operating port 34, and when the second operating port 34 is closed, the second operating port 34 It is not limited to the configuration in which the game ball cannot be entered into the second operation port 34, and the game ball can be entered into the second operation port 34 even when the second operation port 34 is closed. It may be configured such that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second operating port 34 than when it is in an open state. In addition, you may apply this structure to embodiment other than the said 1st Embodiment.

(43) The player cannot replenish the pachinko machine 10 with game balls, and as the game balls circulate within the pachinko machine 10, information on the number of game balls available to the player is stored and held. The configuration of each of the above embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which game balls can be shot within the range of information on the number of usable game balls stored in memory.

(44) Display control based on a command sent from the main controller 60 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on the command sent from the main controller 60 The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of these two control devices may be changed. may be integrated into the main controller 60 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 60 . Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are arbitrary.

(45) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, for example, when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever, the result of the lottery process executed for the winning combination is stored as history information. may be stored as history information, and the actual winning probability of each combination may be calculated using the history information. The information may be used to calculate the actual probability of transition to the special control state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special control state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may provide notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters.

(46) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined. The configuration, the characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined, or the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the fifteenth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment may be combined. In addition, any combination of the other configurations may be applied to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to it is stored in the specific storage means (main side RAM 65). function) and
Privilege for executing processing for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. Granting means (function of executing the process of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92);
In a game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in a prescribed storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, the predetermined information (the first Predetermined storage execution means (the first In the ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S3220 and S3223.

According to the feature A1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to it is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a privilege is given to the player. be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entering means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in the prescribed storage means, and the number of game balls entered into the prescribed ball entry means or the frequency of entry is determined. can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine is stored in the prescribed storage means. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not serve as a trigger for execution of processing for awarding a privilege to the player.

According to feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means by not triggering the execution of the processing for giving a privilege to the player based on the predetermined information. It becomes possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature A3. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
The predetermined memory executing means stores information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means in the predetermined memory means, and stores the information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. Specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball-entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball-entering means are stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the manner in which a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball-entering means. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball-entering frequency between the predetermined ball-entering means and the specific ball-entering means.

Feature A4. All the ball entering means for ejecting the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball entering means, are objects to be stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the entering game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is a ball-entering means.

According to feature A4, all ball entry means for discharging game balls from the game area are subject to management using information stored in the predetermined storage means. can be managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entry means to the number of game balls discharged from the game area using the information stored in the prescribed storage means.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means.

According to feature A5, the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means is included in the predetermined information. It is possible to grasp the ball entry history in detail.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is count information on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entering means.

According to feature A6, since the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball-entering means, the amount of information of the predetermined information is suppressed, and the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means. can be managed.

Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the game ball entered the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation. In the first to seventh embodiments, the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809; in the eighth embodiment, the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of step S3004; function of executing the process of step S3103 in the side CPU 112).

According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation.

Feature A8. Any of features A1 to A7, characterized by comprising external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature A8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the game machine and analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means by using the read information.

Feature A9. A program output means (function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output means uses the information output section to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature A9, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. A means (main A function of executing the processing of step S902 in the side CPU 63).

According to the feature A10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be output to the outside is the control program and the predetermined Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature A11. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A11, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific memory execution means has the predetermined memory execution means, so that the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing the undesired operation.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. can be prevented.

Feature A13. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
The predetermined memory executing means stores information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means in the predetermined memory means, thereby enabling the game to be played to the specific ball entering means. Specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, ninth to third In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means is
First transmission means (first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63) for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means function to output either) and
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means (first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball-entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball-entering means are stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the manner in which a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball-entering means. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball-entering frequency between the predetermined ball-entering means and the specific ball-entering means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means. A second signal path is used to transmit the second information to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Feature A14. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; A gaming machine according to feature A13, further comprising a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means and the entry mode of the game ball to the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the identification information is transmitted to the first information and the first information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature A15. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, characterized by comprising means for transmitting identification information (function for executing recognition processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature A15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, there is no need to store in advance the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature A16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature A17. Characteristic feature A15 or A16, characterized in that the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature A18. The second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means when the identification information is received. Any one of the features A15 to A17, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the second control means is provided with the information that enables the second control means to specify the ball-entering means corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. no longer need to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; function to output either the high-frequency support mode signal or the door open signal),
Characteristic A15, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of A18.

According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage the entry state of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the entry state of the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. In the second control means, as a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, there are more types of information than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The game machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, wherein a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to feature A20, the second control means is provided with a larger number of receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Accordingly, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the receiving section. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. First external output means (management a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
A second external output means (management a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to determine the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means and the state of the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. It becomes possible to specify the manner of entering the ball. In addition, when the external output is performed, the information of the combination of the predetermined information and the information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means is externally output, and the specific information and the correspondence to the specific ball entry means Information in combination with information that makes it possible to recognize that the person is doing is output to the outside. This makes it possible to specify each ball-entering mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. Information computing means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, executing the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management side CPU 112 function, the function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2905 (a function of executing the processing of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). .

According to the feature A22, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means stores information that enables identification of whether or not the game ball entered the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (first storage means). A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3004 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a management side in the ninth embodiment A function to execute the processing of step S3103 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation, and calculates the mode information (first, second, In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, step S2308 in the management side CPU 112; A function of executing the processing of steps S2313 and S2317, a function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, A feature A22 characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S2905 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment. The game machine described.

According to the feature A23, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the predetermined situation exists and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game ball entry mode.

Feature A24. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means. A function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2505 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). game machine.

According to the feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature A25. Characteristic A22 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in A23.

According to the feature A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information is read out and the game ball is entered. When analyzing the mode, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A26. When the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The game machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, wherein the mode information is calculated.

According to feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, the mode information is calculated on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature A27. Characteristic features A22 through A22, characterized in that the information computing means computes the mode information when a computation trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. A gaming machine according to any one of A26.

According to the feature A27, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs while operating power is being supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27, characterized by:

According to feature A28, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of computing the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature A29. Features A22 to A28 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature A29, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine, it is possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature A30. The gaming machine according to feature A29, wherein when the external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine, the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature A30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A31. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
Characteristic A29, wherein the external output means outputs the mode information to a device external to the game machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, or A gaming machine described in A30.

According to feature A31, in a configuration in which a processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S2310, S2314 and S2318 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). , and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature A32, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the game machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the manner of entering a game ball.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means is
means for determining whether or not the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S2503 in the management-side CPU 112);
means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is the storage target information (function for executing the process of step S2504 in the management-side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature A32, comprising:

According to the characteristic A33, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The game according to feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storing and executing means causes the mode information to be accompanied by information that makes it possible to specify the timing at which the mode information was calculated, and causes the calculation result storing means to store the information. machine.

According to the feature A34, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature A35. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics A22 to A34, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to feature A35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature A36. Provided with notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3505, S3507 and S3508 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The game machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, characterized in that

According to feature A36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game ball entry mode without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The game machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature A37, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature A38. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
with
The gaming machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means comprises the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature A39. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, wherein the notification means is controlled so as to execute a second notification.

According to the feature A39, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. Characteristic A1 to characterized by comprising means for externally outputting correspondence information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S218 in the main side CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

According to the feature A40, in the configuration in which the correspondence information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means is externally output, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, by using the corresponding information, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entering means and the frequency of entering the ball, while using the prescribed information stored in the prescribed storage means, It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entering the ball.

Feature A41. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature A41, the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit can exhibit the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features A1 to A41, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined Predetermined storage executing means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment a function of executing the processes of steps S3202, S3205, S3208, S3212, S3216, S3220 and S3223 in
Information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments) for calculating mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period using the predetermined information Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of steps S2308, S2313 and S2317 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment , the function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management-side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the processing of step S2905 in the management-side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. function, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period of time using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to carry out processing corresponding to the result of a game during a predetermined period, or to externally output mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage execution means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments, A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S3004 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S3103 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. functions to execute),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation to calculate the mode information (first, second, sixth, eighth, 9, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth and twelfth embodiments, and the processing of steps S2308, S2313 and S2317 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment , the function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management side in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2905 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the processing of step S3503 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment.

According to the characteristic B2, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the game is in the predetermined situation and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature B3. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means. The feature B1 or B2 characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2505 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment. game machine.

According to the feature B3, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature B4. Characteristic B1 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of (1), it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B5. Characteristic B1, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The game machine according to any one of B4.

According to the characteristic B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information can be obtained on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature B6. Any one of characteristics B1 to B5, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when a computation trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature B6, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, it is possible to finely manage the mode information within the range of one business day. becomes possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized by:

According to feature B7, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of computing the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to feature B8, by outputting the state information to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the game ball entering.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is to be outputted to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature B9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B10. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the game machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, or The gaming machine described in B9.

According to feature B10, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S2310, S2314 and S2318 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). , in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2504 in the management-side CPU 112).

According to feature B11, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature B12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S2504 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized by:

According to the characteristic B12, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The game according to feature B11 or B12, characterized in that the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that enables identification of the timing at which the mode information is calculated, accompanying the mode information. machine.

According to the feature B13, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature B14. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics B1 to B13, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to characteristic B14, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature B15. Provided with notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3505, S3507 and S3508 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized in that

According to feature B15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game during a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the game machine.

Feature B16. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The game machine according to feature B15, wherein the notifying means is provided on the control board.

According to feature B16, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature B17. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, wherein the notification means is controlled so as to execute a second notification.

According to the feature B18, the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is reported instead of the mode information as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to it is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). In the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments; in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S3202, S3205, S3208, S3212, S3216, S3220 and S3223 in the main CPU 63;
Information computing means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, executing the processing of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management side CPU 112 function, the function of executing the processing of step S2502 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2702 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment a function of executing the processing of step S2905 (a function of executing the processing of step S3503 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage processing of the information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates state information corresponding to the ball entry state of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature B20. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature B20, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features B1 to B20, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Program output means (function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main side CPU 63) for outputting the control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output section (reading terminal 102);
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, it is possible to output the special information to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the special information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature C2. Selection means for specifying which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is, and outputting information corresponding to the specified result (step S902 in the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of

According to feature C2, in the configuration in which the special information is externally output using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature C3. The selection means selects, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program. The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized by specifying.

According to feature C3, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, which information should be output from the information output unit is specified. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature C4. Any one of features C1 to C3, wherein a chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output section and the information output means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature C4, it is possible to integrate the signal paths for the information output section within the chip. This makes it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output section, and at the same time, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features C1 to C4, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A first control means (main side CPU 63) and a second control means (management side CPU 112) are provided,
The first control means is
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when a predetermined event occurs (the function of executing the processing of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92);
Information transmission means (function for executing management output processing in the main side CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the event occurs;
with
When receiving the predetermined event information, the second control means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined event information in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth memory). In the embodiment, the predetermined information (first to eighth , history information in the twelfth embodiment, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) are stored in the predetermined storage means (first to ninth , in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S3223.

According to feature D1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the occurrence of the predetermined event. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. Predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege provision means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means is prevented from increasing excessively. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature D2. The game machine according to feature D1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature D2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. can be prevented.

Feature D3. When a specific event occurs, the predetermined memory executing means executes a process of storing information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined memory means, thereby storing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event in the game machine or outside the game machine. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. and
The first control means is
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event are stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the predetermined event occurs, but also the manner in which the specific event occurs. Moreover, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the rate of occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Also, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is sent to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Feature D4. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; The gaming machine according to feature D3, further comprising a function of outputting either a signal during high-frequency support mode or a signal during door opening.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to manage the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event and the manner of occurrence of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the identification information is transmitted to the first information and the first information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature D5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, characterized by comprising transmission means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature D5, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, There is no need to store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature D6, since the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, a predetermined event and a specific event can occur. Under certain circumstances, it is possible to allow the second control means to identify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means.

Feature D7. Characteristic feature D5 or D6, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature D7, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, so a configuration is provided in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting the identification information. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature D8. The second control means, when receiving the identification information, provides correspondence information that makes it possible to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. in correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) (function for executing correspondence setting processing in management side CPU 112). game machine.

According to feature D8, the second control means stores the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event. Thereby, the information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. no longer need to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature D9. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; Equipped with a function to output either a signal during high-frequency support mode or a signal during door opening),
Characteristic D5, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The game machine according to any one of D8.

According to the characteristic D9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature D10. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature D10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features D1 to D10, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, and the feature group D, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a first control means (main side CPU 63);
a second control means (management side CPU 112) for receiving information transmitted from the first control means;
with
The first control means is
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )When,
Identification information transmission means (master side) for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means a function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs, and the second signal path is used when the second event occurs. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Further, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information , need not be stored in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature E2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature E3. The feature E1 or E2, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature E3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature E4. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of features E1 to E3, characterized by comprising means for storing relationship information in correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) (function for executing correspondence setting processing in management side CPU 112) The game machine described.

According to feature E4, the second control means stores the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means. Accordingly, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature E5. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; function to output either the high-frequency support mode signal or the door open signal),
Characteristic feature E1, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The game machine according to any one of E4.

According to the feature E5, it is possible to manage the mode of occurrence of the first event and the mode of occurrence of the second event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature E6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is larger than the number of types of information The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein a signal path is provided.

According to the feature E6, the number of signal paths is greater than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration of the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the second control means.

Feature E7. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature E7, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features E1 to E7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration regarding communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Provided in a game area (game area PA) where game balls flow down, a first state in which game balls can enter or are easy to enter and a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter Variable ball entry means (first to fourteenth, eighteenth embodiment special electric winning device 32, 15th embodiment first special electric winning device 261 and second Special electric prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control for setting the variable ball entry means to the first state and then to the second state (executing special electric open setting processing and special electric closed setting processing in main side CPU 63 function) and
Transition means for shifting the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed (function for executing processing during special figure determination in main side CPU 63);
Special ball entry means (first to thirteenth, eighteenth implementation) that restricts entry of game balls in a predetermined game state that is not the special control state, and allows entry of game balls in the special control state the through gate 35 in the form, the first special entrance 251 and the second special entrance 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment, and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F1, not only is it possible or easier to enter a game ball into the variable ball entering means by shifting the game state to the special control state, but also the game ball can enter the special ball entering means. can enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of shifting the game state to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that it is configured such that a game ball can be entered into the special ball entering means when a predetermined condition is established in the special control state.

According to the feature F2, even if the game state shifts to the special control state, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means unless the predetermined condition is established. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined condition will be satisfied in addition to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state. becomes.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entering means.

According to the feature F3, when the special control state occurs, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the special control state can occur again. . As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the special control state occurs continuously, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature F4. The transition means is means for generating the special control state irrespective of the entry of the game ball into the special ball entry means (the result of executing the propriety determination process of step S1405 for the first reservation information in the main side CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that it has a function of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode as a function.

According to the feature F4, the special control state can occur even if the game ball does not enter the special ball entering means. Then, having the configuration of the feature F3, the occurrence of the special control state enables the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, and the special control state is established by the game ball entering the special ball entry means. can occur again. In this case, the player expects that the special control state will start in a situation that is not in the special control state, and expects that the special control state will be continuously executed in the special control state. .

Feature F5. Predetermined ball entry means (first operating port 33) that enables entry of a game ball at least in the predetermined game state,
At least one method necessary to generate the special control state based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means even if the game ball entering the special ball entering means has not occurred. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, characterized in that a condition is established.

According to the feature F5, the special control state can occur based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means in the predetermined game state which is not the special control state. Then, having the configuration of the feature F3, the occurrence of the special control state enables the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, and the special control state is established by the game ball entering the special ball entry means. can occur again. In this case, the player expects that the game ball will enter the predetermined ball entry means in a predetermined game state that is not the special control state, and in the special control state, not only the variable ball entry means but also the special ball entry The player expects the game ball to enter the means.

Feature F6. The probability that the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means is higher than the probability that the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the height is higher.

According to the feature F6, the probability that the game ball enters the special ball entering means in the special control state is higher than the probability that the special control state occurs due to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means in the predetermined game state that is not in the special control state. The probability that the special control state occurs continuously after entering the ball is higher. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game ball entering the special ball entering means in the special control state.

Feature F7. Means for acquiring special opportunity information when a game ball enters the special ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S1101 in the main side CPU 63 in the first to fifteenth embodiments, in the eighteenth embodiment function to execute the processing of step S4404 in the main CPU 63),
A configuration in which at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is satisfied when the special trigger information is acquired,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6, wherein an expected value for the occurrence of the special control state after acquisition of the special opportunity information does not vary according to the game state.

According to the feature F7, the expected value for the occurrence of the special control state after the acquisition of the special opportunity information does not fluctuate according to the game state, so that the expected value fluctuates according to the game state. , the processing configuration can be simplified, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to add excitement to the game. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature F1 is provided and the configuration allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, the opportunity to acquire the special trigger information is given an intonation. is possible, and as a result, it becomes possible to give inflection to the game.

Feature F8. A trigger ball entry means (second operation port 34) that allows a game ball to enter based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein a trigger for shifting to the special control state is generated based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means.

According to the feature F8, when a game ball enters the special ball entry means, the game ball can enter the opportunity ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, the special control state is established. An opportunity to shift to As a result, in order to continuously generate the special control state, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means in the special control state and further enter the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty of the continuous occurrence of the special control state increases, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F9. The characteristic feature F8 is characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the opportunity ball entry means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when the shooting operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The game machine described.

According to the feature F9, by continuing the shooting operation in a predetermined manner, the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the game ball enters the special ball entering means, and the game ball enters the opportunity ball entering means. It becomes possible to aim at the ball entry.

Feature F10. Means (main side CPU 63) for controlling said trigger ball entry means to enter a ball entry possible state in which a game ball can be entered, with at least one condition being that a game ball has entered said special ball entry means. A function to execute the processing of steps S1108 to S1110 in
Characteristic feature F8 or F9, characterized in that the frequency with which said opportunity ball entry means enters said ball entry possible state with respect to entry of a game ball into said special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state. game machine.

According to the feature F10, the frequency that the trigger ball-entering means is in a state where a game ball can be entered into the special ball-entering means is constant regardless of the game state. The expected value for the occurrence of a special control state after the ball enters does not vary according to the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the expected value is varied according to the game state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to add excitement to the game. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature F1 is provided and the configuration allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, there is an opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. It becomes possible to give intonation, and as a result, it becomes possible to give intonation to the game.

Feature F11. The special control state includes a first special control state (eg 2R high probability result) and a second special control state (eg 16R high probability result),
The game according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the ease with which a game ball enters the special ball entering means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state. machine.

According to the feature F11, the ease with which a game ball enters the special ball entering means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the special ball entering means. The player who expects the special control state expects the occurrence of the special control state in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature F12. A game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the number of times the special control is executed differs between the first special control state and the second special control state.

According to the feature F12, when the variable ball entry means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state.

In this case, the number of times the state is switched in the variable ball-entering means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state. As a result, the ease with which a game ball enters the special ball entry means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state, and entry of the game ball into the special ball entry means is expected. The player expects the occurrence of a special control state in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F13. A game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The game machine is
In the special control state, means for executing a round game in which the special control is executed a predetermined number of times (a function of executing special electric start processing, special electric open processing, and special electric closed processing in the main side CPU 63);
means for terminating the round game when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in one round game reaches a predetermined number (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3703 in the main side CPU 63);
A multiple times execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S3707 when the round counter in the main side CPU 63 = 1) that allows the special control to be executed multiple times in a predetermined round game;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F13, when the variable ball entering means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can be entered into the special ball entering means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state.

In this case, in a predetermined round game, the switching of the above-mentioned state in the variable ball-entering means occurs a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to generate a predetermined round game in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entering means as a round game. Therefore, the player expects the occurrence of a predetermined round game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature F14. At least a high-expectation mode and a low-expectation mode, in which the degree of expectation of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively high and low, are set as execution modes of the special control,
The multiple times execution means is characterized in that the special control that becomes the high expectation mode is executed after the special control that becomes the low expectation mode is executed in the predetermined round game. The game machine according to feature F13.

According to the feature F14, in a predetermined round game, the special control in the high expectation mode is executed after the special control in the low expectation mode is executed, so the state of the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game While ensuring that the switching occurs multiple times, it is possible to allow a plurality of game balls to enter the variable ball entering means in the predetermined round game.

Feature F15. In the feature F14, the high expectation mode is a mode in which the upper limit period in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state is a period equal to or longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the predetermined number. The game machine described.

According to the feature F15, a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game while ensuring that the state switching in the variable ball entry means occurs a plurality of times in the predetermined round game. It is possible to obtain

Feature F16. Characteristically characterized in that a game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F15.

According to the feature F16, when the variable ball entering means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can be entered into the special ball entering means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state.

Feature F17. The special ball-entering means is located downstream of the variable ball-entering means in the game ball flow direction in the game area, and the variable ball-entering means is in the first state or the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F16, characterized in that it is provided at a position where game balls can flow in at the timing of switching to .

According to the feature F17, the special ball entry means is provided at a position where the inflow of the game ball is possible at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state to the second state to the other, When the variable ball entering means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can be entered into the special ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state. Also, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved simply by setting the positional relationship of the special ball-entering means with respect to the variable ball-entering means as described above.

Feature F18. The variable ball entering means is placed in a first corresponding state when the variable ball entering means is in one of the first state and the second state. This state prevents the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the variable ball entry means enters the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state, thereby It has a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entry means causes the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is resting on the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F17, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in.

According to the feature F18, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entering means. As a result, in the special control state, the player can determine not only whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, but also whether or not the game ball is placed on the displacement part. Attention is paid to whether or not the state is switched to the second corresponding state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state.

Feature F19. The gaming machine according to feature F18, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball-entering means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball-entering means.

According to the feature F19, a game ball entry opportunity to the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state, but also when the variable ball-entering means is switched to the second state.

Feature F20. The displacement portion is formed so that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state in which a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a partial range of the displacement portion The gaming machine according to feature F18 or F19, characterized in that the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction so that the game ball can enter.

According to the feature F20, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game ball on which the game ball is placed. It is necessary for the displacement portion to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the ball exists within the predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball resting on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, which makes it possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state.

Feature F21. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the flowing direction of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature F20, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to the feature F21, the predetermined range, which is the range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means in the displacement part, is higher than the specific range where the game ball first reaches in the displacement part. It exists on the forward side of the game ball in the flowing direction. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, it is necessary to move the displacement portion from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. state must be switched. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state.

Feature F22. the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to feature F21, wherein the ball entering portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entering means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

According to the feature F22, a game ball entry opportunity to the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state, but also when the variable ball-entering means is switched to the second state.

In this case, the ball-entering portion of the variable ball-entering means is located on the forward side of the displacement portion in the flowing direction of the game ball from the predetermined range that allows the ball to enter the special ball-entering means in the displacement portion. Existing. As a result, the game ball that is on the displacement part but has not reached the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player's feeling of disadvantage against the fact that the game ball on the displacement part did not enter the variable ball entering means is conversely changed into the feeling of benefit from the fact that the ball enters the special ball entering means. it is possible to change.

Feature F23. The predetermined range is a range in which the next game ball in the firing order exists at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball entering portion when game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle. The gaming machine according to feature F22, characterized in that it is set to .

According to the feature F23, there is a possibility that a game ball exists within a predetermined range of the displacement portion at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state. becomes higher. Therefore, when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game ball entering the special ball entering means.

Feature F24. A first special ball-entering means (first special ball-entering opening 251) and a second special ball-entering means (second special ball-entering opening 252) are provided as the special ball-entering means,
The gaming machine includes means for providing a first profit when a game ball enters the first special ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S3902 in the main side CPU 63);
Means for imparting a second profit when a game ball enters the second special ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S3904 in the main side CPU 63);
with
When the first condition is satisfied in the special control state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first special ball entering means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F23, wherein a game ball can be entered into the second special ball entering means when a second condition is established in the special control state.

According to feature F24, the special ball-entering means to be the ball-entering target is the first special ball-entering means or the second special ball-entering means depending on whether the condition that is established in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. It will be different from And the profit given when the game ball enters the first special ball entering means and the profit given when the game ball enters the second special ball entering means are different. Thereby, the player not only expects that either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, but also allows the game ball to enter the special ball entering means with higher profit. It is expected that the conditions for Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F25. The variable ball entering means is placed in a first corresponding state when the variable ball entering means is in one of the first state and the second state. This state prevents the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the variable ball entry means enters the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state, thereby It has a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement portion is formed so that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
Said first special ball entry means, in a state in which the game ball rests in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a partial range of said displacement portion, said displacement portion changes from said first corresponding state to said first It is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in when the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction when switched to the 2 correspondence state,
Said second special ball entry means, in a state in which the game ball rests in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a partial range of said displacement portion, said displacement portion changes from said first corresponding state to said first The gaming machine according to feature F24, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction when switched to the 2 corresponding state, thereby allowing the game ball to enter.

According to the feature F25, when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion that is in the first corresponding state, it is displaced in a situation where it exists within a range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. Expecting that the part will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball resting on the displacement part.

Feature F26. the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means;
The game ball entering the first special ball entering means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball entering the second special ball entering means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the flowing direction of the game ball,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature F25, wherein the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

According to the feature F26, a game ball entry opportunity to the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state, but also when the variable ball-entering means is switched to the second state.

In this case, the first predetermined range, which is the range in which the ball can enter the first special ball-entering means in the displacement portion, is the range in which the ball can enter the second special ball-entering means in the displacement portion. 2. It exists on the front side of the displacement part in the flowing direction of the game ball beyond the predetermined range, and the ball entering part of the variable ball entering means is ahead of the first predetermined range in the flowing direction of the game ball on the displacement part. exists on the side. The game ball entering the first special ball entering means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball entering the second special ball entering means. As a result, the game ball present on the displacement portion at a position closer to the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means is more likely to enter the first special ball entering means which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the sense of disadvantage that the game ball unfortunately did not enter the ball entering portion becomes stronger.

Feature F27. According to any one of features F1 to F26, characterized in that a game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is in the first state. game machine.

According to feature F27, when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball-entering means, so when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state Then, the player expects both the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means and the game ball to enter the special ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state.

Feature F28. The variable ball entry means
A ball entry section (first big prize opening 265, second big prize opening 266) into which game balls can enter,
A guidance state in which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be placed and can be guided to the ball entry portion, and a game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be guided forward. Guiding means (first guiding plate 271, second guiding plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to non-guiding states that do not guide to the entry ball portion;
with
The variable ball-entering means enters the first state when the guiding means enters the guiding state, and the variable ball-entering means enters the second state when the guiding means enters the non-guiding state,
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means and flowing down to a separate area different from the ball entering portion is placed at a position where the game ball can enter. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F27, characterized in that means are provided.

According to the feature F28, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state by the induction means being in the induction state, the game ball placed on the induction means is either the variable ball entry means or the special ball entry means. is induced. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game ball placed on the guiding means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F29. Means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail group 267, second guide nail) for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area toward the guidance start range of the guide means are provided upstream of the guide means in the direction in which the game balls flow. group 268);
The guide means is formed so that a game ball placed on the guide means flows down in a predetermined guide direction along the guide means in the guide state,
The gaming machine according to feature F28, wherein the ball-entering portion and the separate area are present on the side of the predetermined guidance direction with respect to the guidance start range.

According to the feature F29, both the ball-entering part and the separate area exist on the leading side of the guiding means in the downstream direction of the game ball from the guidance start range where the game ball first reaches in the guiding means. there is As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to how the game ball flows down in the guide means.

Feature F30. The gaming machine according to feature F29, wherein the separate area exists on the side of the predetermined guidance direction with respect to the ball-entering portion.

According to the feature F30, a game ball that has been placed on the guiding means in the guided state but has passed through the ball entering portion without entering the ball enters the special ball entering means. As a result, the player's feeling of disadvantage against the fact that the game ball on the guide means did not enter the variable ball entering means is conversely changed into the feeling of benefit from the fact that the ball enters the special ball entering means. it is possible to change.

Feature F31. As the variable ball entry means, a first variable ball entry means (first special electric prize winning device 261) and a second variable ball entry means (second special electric prize winning device 262) are provided,
A first special ball entering means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entering means (second through gate 264) are provided as the special ball entering means,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first variable ball entering means, is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the first guiding means and the first The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down to a first separate area different from the first ball entry part that is the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means can be entered,
When the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281), which is the guiding means of the second variable ball entering means, is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the second guiding means and the second guiding means The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down to a second separate area different from the second ball entry part, which is the said ball entry part of the variable ball entry means, can be entered. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features F28 to F30.

According to the feature F31, there is a combination of the first variable ball-entering means and the first special ball-entering means and a combination of the second variable ball-entering means and the second special ball-entering means. Thus, by differentiating the types of combinations to be subjected to special control in the special control state, it is possible to make the percentage of game balls entering the variable ball entering means and the special ball entering means different. .

Feature F32. The probability that the game ball placed on the first guide means in the induced state enters the first special ball entering means, and the game ball placed on the second guide means in the induced state The gaming machine according to feature F31, wherein the probability of a ball entering the second special ball entering means is different.

According to the feature F32, it is possible to vary the probability of a game ball entering the special ball-entering means by differentiating the types of combinations to be subjected to the special control in the special control state. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player to the execution target of the special control.

Feature F33. The special control state includes a first special control state (eg 2R low probability result) and a second special control state (eg 2R high probability result),
In the first special control state and the second special control state, the type of the variable ball-entering means to be executed in the special control or the selection mode of the variable ball-entering means to be executed in the special control is determined. The gaming machine according to feature F32, characterized in that they are different.

According to the feature F33, it is possible to vary the ball entry probability of the game ball into the special ball entry means according to the type of the special control state. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the type of special control state.

Feature F34. The gaming machine according to any one of features F31 to F33, wherein the second special ball-entering means is provided downstream of the first special ball-entering means in the direction in which the game ball flows.

According to feature F34, since the second special ball entering means is provided downstream of the first special ball entering means in the direction in which the game ball flows, the first variable ball entering means is subject to special control. When this happens, not only can the game ball enter the first special ball entering means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entering means. Therefore, the player expects the first variable ball-entering means to be subject to special control.

Feature F35. The same privilege is given when the game ball enters the first special ball entering means and when the game ball enters the second special ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F31 to F34.

According to the feature F35, the same privilege is given regardless of whether the game ball enters the first special ball entry means or the game ball enters the second special ball entry means, It is possible to suppress the sense of disadvantage felt by the player regardless of whether the execution target of the special control is the first variable ball-entering means or the second variable ball-entering means.

Feature F36. The number of game balls usable by the player is increased based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the game ball can be used by the player based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F35, further comprising means for increasing the number of game balls (a function of executing the processing of steps S3902 and S3904 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature F36, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player increases, and when a game ball enters the special ball entry means, the player increases the number of game balls that can be used. By having the configuration of the feature F1, not only is it possible or easier to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means by shifting the game state to the special control state, A game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of increase in the number of game balls that the player can use in the special control state, and it is possible to increase the advantage in the special control state.

Feature F37. Acquisition corresponding ball entry means (sudden gate 311) that enables entry of a game ball at least in the predetermined game state;
Information acquisition means (main side CPU 63) for acquiring special opportunity information when a game ball enters the special ball entry means, and acquiring the special opportunity information when a game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means A function to execute the acquisition process of the reservation information on the general map side shown in FIG. 92 in),
Trigger ball entry means (second actuation port 34) that is in a state where game balls can be entered based on the fact that the special trigger information has been acquired;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F36, wherein a trigger for shifting to the special control state is generated based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means.

According to the feature F37, even in a predetermined gaming state that is not a special control state, the special trigger information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means, and the special trigger information is acquired and entered. A chance to shift to the special control state is generated based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Thereby, not only in the special control state but also in the predetermined game state, the acquisition of the special opportunity information causes the opportunity ball entry means to enter a ball entering state, and the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means. It is possible to create a situation in which a special control state occurs based on

Feature F38. A regulation means (limit nail 312) is provided for making the probability of a game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means lower than the probability of a game ball entering the special ball entry means in the special control state. The gaming machine according to feature F37, characterized in that

According to the feature F38, it is possible to reduce the probability of transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-corresponding ball entry means in the predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the satisfaction of the player with respect to the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-corresponding ball entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature F39. Predetermined ball entry means (first operating port 33) that enables entry of a game ball at least in the predetermined game state,
An opportunity to shift to the special control state is generated without acquiring the special opportunity information based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means,
Characteristic feature F38, wherein the regulating means makes the probability of a game ball entering the acquisition-corresponding ball entering means lower than the probability of a game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means. game machine.

According to the feature F39, a game ball can be entered in a predetermined game state, and the occurrence of the game ball entry is the acquisition corresponding ball entry means rather than the predetermined ball entry means that triggers the transition to the special control state. The ball entry probability of the game ball is lower. As a result, it is possible to enhance the satisfaction of the player with respect to the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-corresponding ball entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature F40. Acquisition corresponding notification is executed in a situation where the opportunity ball entering means is in the enterable state based on the acquisition of the special opportunity information by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means. The game machine according to any one of features F37 to F39, further comprising notification execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S4413 in the main side CPU 63, the display control device 82).

According to the feature F40, execution of acquisition correspondence notification that a game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means and that the opportunity ball entry means becomes a ball entry possible state by acquiring the special trigger information. It is possible to notify the player through As a result, even though the game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means becomes ready for entry, the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means without noticing it. It is possible to make it difficult for the phenomenon of losing the opportunity to enter the ball to occur.

Feature F41. The notification executing means executes the acquisition corresponding notification on the condition that the special trigger information is acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means in a situation that is not in the special control state. The gaming machine according to feature F40, characterized in that:

In the special control state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means. In a predetermined game state that is not a state, the game ball does not enter the special ball-entering means. In this case, according to the feature F41, when the special trigger information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means in a situation that is not in the special control state, the acquisition corresponding notification is executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the ball-entering means being in a ball-enterable state. In addition, by preventing execution of acquisition response notification in a special control state in which the player is highly likely to be conscious of the opportunity ball entry means being in a state in which it is possible to enter a ball, execution of acquisition response notification is reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming troublesome.

Feature F42. The notification executing means is provided with the condition that the special opportunity information is acquired by the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding entering ball in a situation where the special opportunity information is not acquired. The gaming machine according to feature F40 or F41, characterized by being executed.

According to the feature F42, it is possible to execute the notification corresponding to acquisition in a situation where the player is less aware of the fact that the opportunity ball entry means is in the state where the ball can be entered.

Feature F43. Characteristic feature F37, characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the acquisition corresponding ball entry means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when the shooting operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The game machine according to any one of F42.

According to feature F43, by continuing the shooting operation in a predetermined manner, the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the game ball enters the special ball entering means, and the game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entering means. It becomes possible to aim at the entering ball of a game ball.

Feature F44. The opportunity ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball is more likely to reach the opportunity ball entry means when the shooting operation is performed in a specific mode than when the shooting operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature F43, characterized in that:

According to feature F44, when the opportunity ball entry means is in a state where it is possible to enter a ball in a situation that is not in the special control state, a game ball can be entered into the opportunity ball entry means by performing a shooting operation in a specific mode. It is possible to make it easier for balls to be generated.

Feature F45. Trigger ball entry means (second actuation opening 34) that enables entry of a game ball based on the entry of a game ball into the special ball entry means;
grant determination means for executing grant determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S1405 in the main side CPU 63);
Based on the result of the grant determination being the first grant correspondence result, the game state is shifted to the special control state, and the game state after the end of the special control state is the game state before the start of the special control state. Means (function for executing the processing of steps S1904 and S1905 in the main CPU 63) capable of setting different game states;
Based on the fact that the result of the grant determination is the second grant correspondence result, the game state is shifted to a predetermined game state in which the special control is executed by the special control means, and the game state after the predetermined game state ends Means for maintaining the game state before the predetermined game state is executed (function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main side CPU 63);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F44, wherein a probability that the result of the award determination is the second award correspondence result is higher than a probability that the result is the first award correspondence result.

According to the feature F45, when the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, not only can the first award correspondence result be obtained, but also the second award correspondence result can be obtained, and the probability of the second award correspondence result is higher. Higher than the probability of the first grant correspondence result. As a result, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the variable ball-entering means to be in the first state by causing the game ball to enter the opportunity ball-entering means. In this case, with the configuration of the feature F1 described above, and the configuration that allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, the variable ball entry means is triggered by the occurrence of the special control state. becomes the first state.

For the configuration of features F1 to F45, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Provided in a game area (game area PA) where game balls flow down, a first state in which game balls can enter or are easy to enter and a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter Variable ball entry means (first to thirteenth, 18th embodiment special electric winning device 32, 15th embodiment first special electric winning device 261 and second Special electric prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control for setting the variable ball entry means to the first state and then to the second state (executing special electric open setting processing and special electric closed setting processing in main side CPU 63 function) and
Special ball entry means (thru gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first through gate 263 and second through gate in the fifteenth embodiment) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter gate 264);
Trigger ball entry means (second actuation opening 34) that allows entry of a game ball based on entry of a game ball into the special ball entry means;
grant determination means for executing grant determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S1405 in the main side CPU 63);
Based on the fact that the result of the grant determination is the first grant correspondence result, the special control is executed (opening and closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result), and the special a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1904 and S1905 in the main side CPU 63) capable of making the game state after the end of the control state different from the game state before the start of the special control state;
A predetermined game state in which the special control by the special control means is executed based on the result of the grant determination being the second grant corresponding result (opening and closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result) , and the game state after the end of the predetermined game state is maintained in the game state before the predetermined game state is executed (the function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63);
with
A configuration in which the probability of the second grant correspondence result in the grant determination is higher than the probability of the first grant correspondence result,
A game machine characterized in that it is configured such that a game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation.

According to the feature G1, when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, not only the first given response result but also the second given correspondence result can be obtained, and the probability of the second given correspondence result is higher. Higher than the probability of the first grant correspondence result. As a result, it is possible to generate an opportunity for the variable ball-entering means to be in the first state by causing the game ball to enter the opportunity ball-entering means. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball into the special ball-entering means that causes the opportunity ball-entering means to enter the ball-enterable state in a predetermined situation. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means expects the occurrence of the predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The game according to feature G1, characterized in that the frequency with which said opportunity ball entry means enters said ball entry possible state with respect to entry of a game ball into said special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state. machine.

According to feature G2, the frequency that the trigger ball-entering means is in a state where a game ball can enter the special ball-entering means is constant regardless of the game state. The expected value for the occurrence of a state in which special control is executed after the ball enters the ball does not vary according to the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the expected value is varied according to the game state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not change according to the game state, it becomes difficult to add excitement to the game. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature G1 is provided and the configuration allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation, the intonation is given to the opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. can be given, and as a result, it is possible to give inflection to the game.

Feature G3. A predetermined ball entry means (first operation port 33) that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter,
The grant determination means executes the grant determination based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means, and the grant determination based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. death,
A high-probability state and a low-probability state are set as a state in which the grant determination by the grant determination means is performed so that the probability of the first grant correspondence result in the grant determination is relatively high or low,
The game machine controls the game cycle executing means so that the game cycle motion is started on the basis of the grant determination, and the game cycle motion ends when the motion continuation period elapses. Time control means (function to execute special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing and special figure confirmation processing in main side CPU 63),
period determining means for determining the operation continuation period (function for executing the process of step S1414 in the main CPU 63);
with
The period determination means is the action for game rotation triggered by the grant determination executed based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means in the low probability state, and the result of the grant determination is the The average period of the motion continuation period of the game turn motion in the case where the first grant correspondence result is not obtained is the grant determination executed based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the low probability state. It is the same, substantially the same, or shorter than the average period of the operation duration of the game-playing motion used as a trigger when the result of the grant determination is not the first grant-response result. is a configuration that
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation different from a situation in which the grant determination is made in the low probability state.

According to feature G3, the action for game rotation triggered by the grant determination executed based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means in the low probability state, and the result of the grant determination is the first grant correspondence result. wherein the average period of the operation duration of the game-turning motion in the case of not It is the same, substantially the same, or shorter than the average duration of the action continuation period of the game-playing motion when the result of the grant determination does not result in the first grant corresponding result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the digestion rate of the former game-return motion from becoming extremely worse than the digestion rate of the latter game-return motion. However, in addition to having such a configuration, a configuration is provided in which the frequency at which the trigger ball entry means is in a state where a game ball enters the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state, as in feature G2. If it is, it is assumed that the game is played aiming at the entry of the game ball to the opportunity ball entry means in a low probability state. On the other hand, in a situation where grant determination is performed in the low probability state, the game ball cannot be entered into the special ball entry means. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to play a game aiming for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball-entering means.

Feature G4. Characteristic features G1 to G1, characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the opportunity ball entry means are provided in the region where the game ball flows down when the shooting operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of G3.

According to feature G4, by continuing the shooting operation in a predetermined manner, the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the game ball enters the special ball entering means, and the game ball enters the opportunity ball entering means. It becomes possible to aim at the ball entry.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the predetermined situation is a state in which the special control is executed.

According to feature G5, by shifting to a state in which special control is executed, not only is it possible or easier to enter a game ball into the variable ball entering means, but also the game ball into the special ball entering means becomes possible. It is possible to enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of shifting to the state in which the special control is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that a game ball can be entered into the special ball entering means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a state in which the special control is executed.

According to the feature G6, even if the special control is executed, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means unless the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined condition is satisfied in addition to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the state in which the special control is executed, and the game in the state in which the special control is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the ease with which a game ball enters the special ball entering means differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state.

According to feature G7, the ease of entry of a game ball into the special ball entry means is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state, so that the game expects the entry of the game ball into the special ball entry means. Players expect the occurrence of a state in which game balls are likely to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature G8. A game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The game machine according to feature G7, wherein the number of times the special control is executed differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state.

According to feature G8, when the variable ball entry means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects to which the player should pay attention when the special control is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the special control is being executed.

In this case, the number of times the state is switched in the variable ball-entering means differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state. As a result, the easiness of the game ball entering the special ball entering means differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state, and the player who expects the game ball to enter the special ball entering means It is expected that a special control execution state in which the game ball is likely to enter the ball entering means will occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G9. The game ball flowing down from the upstream side is placed on the first corresponding state to prevent the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the second corresponding state causes the game ball to move in the predetermined direction. It has a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows it to flow down to
The special ball entry means causes the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is resting on the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in.

According to the feature G9, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entering means. As a result, attention can be paid to whether or not the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is resting on the displacement portion, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature G10. The displacement portion is formed so that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state in which a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a partial range of the displacement portion The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where game balls flow down in the predetermined direction so that the game balls can enter.

According to the feature G10, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game ball on which the game ball is placed. It is necessary for the displacement portion to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the ball exists within the predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball resting on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G11. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the flowing direction of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature G10, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to the feature G11, the predetermined range, which is the range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means in the displacement part, is higher than the specific range where the game ball first reaches in the displacement part. It exists on the forward side of the game ball in the flowing direction. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, it is necessary to move the displacement portion from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. state must be switched. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement part, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G12. The target ball entry means, which is either the variable ball entry means or the separate ball entry means,
A ball entry section (first big prize opening 265, second big prize opening 266) into which game balls can enter,
A guidance state in which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be placed and can be guided to the ball entry portion, and a game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be guided forward. Guiding means (first guiding plate 271, second guiding plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to non-guiding states that do not guide to the entry ball portion;
with
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means and flowing down to a separate area different from the ball entering portion is placed at a position where the game ball can enter. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, wherein means is provided.

According to the feature G12, when the guiding means is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means is guided to either the ball entering portion of the target ball entering means or the special ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game ball placed on the guiding means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G13. Means (first guide nail group 267, second guide nail group 267, second guide nail) for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area toward the guidance start range of the guide means are provided upstream of the guide means in the direction in which the game balls flow. group 268);
The guide means is formed so that a game ball placed on the guide means flows down in a predetermined guide direction along the guide means in the guide state,
The gaming machine according to feature G12, wherein the ball-entering portion and the separate area are present on the side of the predetermined guidance direction with respect to the guidance start range.

According to the feature G13, both the ball entry portion and the separate area that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means are located in the guidance means rather than the guidance start range where the game ball first reaches in the guidance means. It exists on the forward side of the game ball in the flowing direction. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to how the game ball flows down in the guide means.

Feature G14. The gaming machine according to feature G13, wherein the separate area exists on the side of the predetermined guiding direction from the ball-entering portion.

According to the feature G14, a game ball that has been placed on the guiding means in the guiding state but has passed through the ball entering portion without entering the ball entering means enters the special ball entering means. As a result, the player's feeling of disadvantage against the fact that the game ball on the guiding means does not enter the ball-entering part is converted into a feeling of profit against the fact that the ball enters the special ball-entering means. becomes possible.

Feature G15. A first target ball-entering means (first special electric winning device 261) and a second target ball-entering means (second special electric winning device 262) are provided as the target ball-entering means,
A first special ball entering means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entering means (second through gate 264) are provided as the special ball entering means,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first target ball entering means, is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the first guiding means and the first The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down to a first separate area different from the first ball entry part, which is the ball entry part of the target ball entry means, can be entered,
When the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281), which is the guiding means of the second target ball entering means, is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the second guiding means and the second The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down to a second separate area different from the second ball entry part, which is the ball entry part of the target ball entry means, can be entered. The gaming machine according to any one of features G12 to G14.

According to feature G15, there are a combination of the first target ball entering means and the first special ball entering means and a combination of the second target ball entering means and the second special ball entering means. Thus, by differentiating the types of combinations to be subjected to the guidance control in the state where the guidance control is executed, the percentage of game balls entering the target ball entry means and the special ball entry means can be differentiated. becomes possible.

Feature G16. The probability that the game ball placed on the first guide means in the induced state enters the first special ball entering means, and the game ball placed on the second guide means in the induced state The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the probability of a ball entering the second special ball entering means is different.

According to the feature G16, it is possible to vary the probability of a game ball entering the special ball entry means by making different types of combinations to be subjected to the guidance control in a state where the guidance control is executed. . As a result, it becomes possible to increase the attention of the player to the execution target of the guidance control.

Feature G17. The gaming machine according to feature G15 or G16, wherein the second special ball-entering means is provided downstream of the first special ball-entering means in the direction in which the game ball flows.

According to feature G17, since the second special ball entering means is provided downstream of the first special ball entering means in the direction in which the game ball flows, the first target ball entering means is subject to special control. When this happens, not only can the game ball enter the first special ball entering means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entering means. Therefore, the player expects the first target ball-entering means to be the execution target of the guidance control.

Feature G18. The same privilege is given when the game ball enters the first special ball entering means and when the game ball enters the second special ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G15 to G17.

According to the feature G18, the same privilege is granted regardless of whether the game ball enters the first special ball entry means or the second special ball entry means, It is possible to suppress the sense of disadvantage felt by the player regardless of whether the execution target of the guidance control is the first target ball entering means or the second target ball entering means.

For the configuration of features G1 to G18, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. The game ball flowing down from the upstream side is placed on the first corresponding state to prevent the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the second corresponding state causes the game ball to move in the predetermined direction. A displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows it to flow down to
When the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state in which the game ball is placed on the displacement portion, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction, thereby causing the game ball to flow in. Special ball entry means provided at a position where 252, a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H1, when the displacement part switches from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state, the game ball placed on the displacement part can enter the special ball entering means. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the displacement part is switched from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state in a state where the game ball is placed on the displacement part, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

Feature H2. The displacement portion is formed so that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state in which a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a partial range of the displacement portion The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where game balls flow down in the predetermined direction so that the game balls can enter.

According to the feature H2, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game ball on which the game ball is placed It is necessary for the displacement portion to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the ball exists within the predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball resting on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H3. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided on the upstream side of the displacement portion in the flow direction of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to the feature H3, the predetermined range, which is the range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means in the displacement part, is higher than the specific range in which the game ball first reaches the displacement part. It exists on the forward side of the game ball in the flowing direction. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, it is necessary to move the displacement portion from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. state must be switched. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement part, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the predetermined ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) exists on the side of the predetermined range in the specific direction.

According to feature H4, the predetermined ball-entering portion exists on the front side of the displacement portion in the flowing direction of the game ball from a predetermined range that allows the ball to enter the special ball-entering means in the displacement portion. is doing. As a result, the game ball that is on the displacement portion but has not reached the predetermined ball entry portion enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player's feeling of disadvantage when the game ball placed on the displacement part does not enter the predetermined ball entering part, and conversely, the player's feeling of benefit when the ball enters the special ball entering means. can be changed to

Feature H5. In the predetermined range, when game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle, at the timing when one game ball reaches the predetermined ball entry portion, there is a game ball in the next firing order. The gaming machine according to feature H4, characterized in that it is set within a range where the

According to the feature H5, at the timing when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state, the possibility that the game ball exists in the predetermined range of the displacement portion increases. . Therefore, when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game ball entering the special ball entering means.

Feature H6. A first special ball-entering means (first special ball-entering opening 251) and a second special ball-entering means (second special ball-entering opening 252) are provided as the special ball-entering means,
The gaming machine includes means for providing a first profit when a game ball enters the first special ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S3902 in the main side CPU 63);
Means for imparting a second profit when a game ball enters the second special ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S3904 in the main side CPU 63);
with
Said first special ball entry means, in a state in which the game ball rests in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a partial range of said displacement portion, said displacement portion changes from said first corresponding state to said first It is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in when the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction when switched to the 2 correspondence state,
Said second special ball entry means, in a state in which the game ball rests in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a partial range of said displacement portion, said displacement portion changes from said first corresponding state to said first Any one of the characteristics H1 to H5 characterized in that the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction when switched to the 2 correspondence state, and the game ball can flow in. The game machine described.

According to the feature H6, when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, the displacement is in a range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. Expecting that the part will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball resting on the displacement part.

Feature H7. The displacement portion is formed so that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The game ball entering the first special ball entering means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball entering the second special ball entering means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement portion is provided on the upstream side of the displacement portion in the flow direction of the game ball,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the predetermined ball-entering portion exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

According to feature H7, the first predetermined range, which is the range in which the ball can enter the first special ball-entering means at the displacement part, is the range in which the ball can enter the second special ball-entering means at the displacement part. It exists on the front side in the flowing direction of the game ball on the displacement portion than a certain second predetermined range, and the predetermined ball entry portion is on the front side in the flowing direction of the game ball on the displacement portion than the first predetermined range. exists in The game ball entering the first special ball entering means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball entering the second special ball entering means. Then, the game ball existing at a position closer to the predetermined ball-entering portion on the displacement portion is more likely to enter the first special ball-entering means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the sense of disadvantage that the game ball did not enter becomes stronger.

Feature H8. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein a plurality of types of operation modes are set for the displacement portion.

According to the feature H8, by setting a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement portion, there are a plurality of types of predetermined situations in which the frequency of hitting the special ball-entering means is different.

For the configuration of features H1 to H8, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Provided in a game area (game area PA) where game balls flow down, a first state in which game balls can enter or are easy to enter and a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter Variable ball entry means (first to fourteenth, eighteenth embodiment special electric winning device 32, 15th embodiment first special electric winning device 261 and second Special electric prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control for setting the variable ball entry means to the first state and then to the second state (executing special electric open setting processing and special electric closed setting processing in main side CPU 63 function) and
Transition means for shifting the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed (function for executing processing during special figure determination in main side CPU 63);
In a predetermined game state that is not the special control state, entry of game balls is restricted, and in the special control state, special ball entry means (first special ball entry port 251 and second special entrance 252),
The number of game balls usable by the player is increased based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the game ball can be used by the player based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means. A means for increasing the number of game balls (a function of executing the processing of steps S3902 and S3904 in the main side CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, not only is it possible or easier for a game ball to enter the variable ball entering means by shifting the game state to the special control state, but also the game ball can enter the special ball entering means. can enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of shifting the game state to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player increases, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the player can use the game ball. The number of possible game balls increases. With the above configuration, not only is it possible or easier to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means by shifting the game state to the special control state, but also the special ball entry is achieved. A game ball can enter the means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of increase in the number of game balls that the player can use in the special control state, and it is possible to increase the advantage in the special control state.

Feature I2. The special ball-entering means is located downstream of the variable ball-entering means in the game ball flow direction in the game area, and the variable ball-entering means is in the first state or the second state. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that it is provided at a position where game balls can flow in at the timing of switching to .

According to feature I2, when the variable ball entering means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the gaming ball that did not enter the variable ball entering means is not entered into the special ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, the game balls that have escaped from the variable ball entry means enter the special ball entry means, and the game balls enter the special ball entry means, thereby increasing the number of usable game balls. , it is possible to suppress the player's disadvantageous feeling caused by the occurrence of a game ball that has leaked from the ball-entering target of the variable ball-entering means.

Feature I3. The variable ball entering means is placed in a first corresponding state when the variable ball entering means is in one of the first state and the second state. This state prevents the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the variable ball entry means enters the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state, thereby It has a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entry means causes the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is resting on the displacement portion. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in.

According to the characteristic I3, when the displacement portion switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball placed on the displacement portion can enter the special ball entering means. As a result, in the special control state, the player can determine not only whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, but also whether or not the game ball is placed on the displacement part. Attention is paid to whether or not the state is switched to the second corresponding state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball-entering means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball-entering means.

According to the feature I4, a game ball entry opportunity to the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state, but also when the variable ball-entering means is switched to the second state.

Feature I5. The displacement portion is formed so that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
The special ball entry means, when the displacement portion is switched from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state in which a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a partial range of the displacement portion The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where game balls flow down in the predetermined direction so that the game balls can enter.

According to the feature I5, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, not only the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state, but also the game ball on which the game ball is placed It is necessary for the displacement portion to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the ball exists within the predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball resting on the displacement portion and the switching timing of the state of the displacement portion, which makes it possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state.

Feature I6. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the flowing direction of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to the feature I6, the predetermined range, which is the range in which the ball can be entered into the special ball entry means in the displacement part, is higher than the specific range where the game ball first reaches in the displacement part. It exists on the forward side of the game ball in the flowing direction. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, it is necessary to move the displacement portion from the first correspondence state to the second correspondence state at an exquisite timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement portion. state must be switched. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement portion, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the special control state.

Feature I7. the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the ball entering portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entering means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

According to the feature I7, a game ball entry opportunity to the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state, but also when the variable ball-entering means is switched to the second state.

In this case, the ball-entering portion of the variable ball-entering means is located on the forward side of the displacement portion in the flowing direction of the game ball from the predetermined range that allows the ball to enter the special ball-entering means in the displacement portion. Existing. As a result, the game ball that is on the displacement part but has not reached the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player's feeling of disadvantage against the fact that the game ball on the displacement part did not enter the variable ball entering means is conversely changed into the feeling of benefit from the fact that the ball enters the special ball entering means. it is possible to change.

Feature I8. The predetermined range is a range in which the next game ball in the firing order exists at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball entering portion when game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle. The gaming machine according to feature I7, characterized in that it is set to .

According to feature I8, there is a possibility that a game ball exists within a predetermined range of the displacement portion at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state. becomes higher. Therefore, when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game ball entering the special ball entering means.

Feature I9. A first special ball-entering means (first special ball-entering opening 251) and a second special ball-entering means (second special ball-entering opening 252) are provided as the special ball-entering means,
The gaming machine includes means for providing a first profit when a game ball enters the first special ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S3902 in the main side CPU 63);
Means for imparting a second profit when a game ball enters the second special ball entry means (function for executing the processing of step S3904 in the main side CPU 63);
with
When the first condition is satisfied in the special control state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first special ball entering means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I8, wherein a game ball can be entered into the second special ball entering means when a second condition is established in the special control state.

According to feature I9, the special ball-entering means to be the ball-entering target is the first special ball-entering means or the second special ball-entering means depending on whether the condition that is established in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition. It will be different from And the profit given when the game ball enters the first special ball entering means and the profit given when the game ball enters the second special ball entering means are different. Thereby, the player not only expects that either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the special control state, but also allows the game ball to enter the special ball entering means with higher profit. It is expected that the conditions for Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I10. The variable ball entering means is placed in a first corresponding state when the variable ball entering means is in one of the first state and the second state. This state prevents the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and the variable ball entry means enters the second corresponding state in the other state of the first state and the second state, thereby It has a displacement portion (guide plate portion 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement portion is formed so that a game ball placed on the displacement portion in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement portion,
Said first special ball entry means, in a state in which the game ball rests in a first predetermined range (first range X1) which is a partial range of said displacement portion, said displacement portion changes from said first corresponding state to said first It is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in when the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction when switched to the 2 correspondence state,
Said second special ball entry means, in a state in which the game ball rests in a second predetermined range (second range X2) which is a partial range of said displacement portion, said displacement portion changes from said first corresponding state to said first The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the 2 corresponding state, thereby allowing the game ball to enter.

According to the feature I10, when the game ball is placed on the displacement portion in the first correspondence state, the displacement is in a range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. Expecting that the part will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball resting on the displacement part.

Feature I11. the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means;
The game ball entering the first special ball entering means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball entering the second special ball entering means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the flowing direction of the game ball,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means is present on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

According to the feature I11, a game ball entry opportunity to the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention not only when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state, but also when the variable ball-entering means is switched to the second state.

In this case, the first predetermined range, which is the range in which the ball can enter the first special ball-entering means in the displacement portion, is the range in which the ball can enter the second special ball-entering means in the displacement portion. 2. It exists on the front side of the displacement part in the flowing direction of the game ball beyond the predetermined range, and the ball entering part of the variable ball entering means is ahead of the first predetermined range in the flowing direction of the game ball on the displacement part. exists on the side. The game ball entering the first special ball entering means is more advantageous for the player than the game ball entering the second special ball entering means. As a result, the game ball present on the displacement portion at a position closer to the ball entering portion of the variable ball entering means is more likely to enter the first special ball entering means which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to increase the profit for the player in a situation where the sense of disadvantage that the game ball unfortunately did not enter the ball entering portion becomes stronger.

For the configuration of features I1 to I11, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Provided in a game area (game area PA) where game balls flow down, a first state in which game balls can enter or are easy to enter and a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter Variable ball entry means (first to fourteenth, eighteenth embodiment special electric winning device 32, first special electric winning device 261 and second special electric winning device 261 in fifteenth embodiment) Special electric prize winning device 262),
Special control means for executing special control for setting the variable ball entry means to the first state and then to the second state (executing special electric open setting processing and special electric closed setting processing in main side CPU 63 function) and
Transition means for shifting the game state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed (function for executing processing during special figure determination in the main side CPU 63);
Special ball entry means (first to thirteenth, eighteenth embodiments) that restricts entry of a game ball in a predetermined game state and allows entry of a game ball in a game state that is not the predetermined game state the through gate 35, the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 in the fourteenth embodiment, the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment),
Acquisition corresponding ball entry means (sudden gate 311) that enables entry of a game ball at least in the predetermined game state;
When a game ball enters the special ball entry means, a game ball enters a state in which entry of a game ball is possible, and when a game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means, a game ball enters the game ball. Trigger ball entry means (second actuation port 34) for entering a ball entry possible state;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that a trigger for shifting to the special control state is generated based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means.

According to the characteristic J1, it is possible to enter a ball into the special ball-entering means that causes the opportunity ball-entering means to enter the ball-enterable state in a game state other than the predetermined game state. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means expects the occurrence of a game state that is not the predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, even in a predetermined gaming state, the opportunity ball-entering means can enter a ball based on the game ball entering the acquisition-corresponding ball-entering means. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the opportunity ball entry means that has entered the ball entry possible state, a transition opportunity to the special control state is generated. As a result, the opportunity ball-entering means becomes enterable not only in a game state other than the predetermined game state, but also in a predetermined game state, and a special control state is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the opportunity ball-entering means. It is possible to create a situation where

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the game state that is not the predetermined game state includes the special control state.

According to feature J2, not only is it possible or easier to enter a game ball into the variable ball entering means by shifting the game state to the special control state, but also the game ball can enter the special ball entering means. can enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of shifting the game state to the special control state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J3. Regulating means (restriction A gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized in that it comprises a nail 312).

According to the feature J3, it is possible to reduce the probability of transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-corresponding ball entry means in the predetermined game state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the satisfaction of the player with respect to the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-corresponding ball entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature J4. Predetermined ball entry means (first operation opening 33) that enables entry of game balls at least in the predetermined game state,
An opportunity to shift to the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means,
Characteristic feature J3, wherein the regulation means makes the probability of a game ball entering the acquisition-corresponding ball entering means lower than the probability of a game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means. game machine.

According to the feature J4, a game ball can be entered in a predetermined game state, and the occurrence of the game ball entry is a transition to the special control state rather than the predetermined ball entry means. , the ball entry probability of the game ball is lower. As a result, it is possible to enhance the satisfaction of the player with respect to the transition to the special control state based on the entry of the game ball into the acquisition-corresponding ball entry means in the predetermined game state.

Feature J5. Notification execution means (main side CPU 63) for executing acquisition correspondence notification in a situation where the opportunity ball entry means is in the state where the ball can be entered based on the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entry means The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of step S4413 in step S4413, and a display control device 82).

According to the feature J5, it is possible to notify the player through execution of acquisition correspondence notification that a game ball has entered the acquisition corresponding ball entry means and that the opportunity ball entry means is in a state in which a ball can be entered. becomes. As a result, even though the game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means becomes ready for entry, the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means without noticing it. It is possible to make it difficult for the phenomenon of losing the opportunity to enter the ball to occur.

Feature J6. Characteristic feature J5, characterized in that the notification executing means executes the acquisition corresponding notification on condition that a game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entering means in the predetermined gaming state. game machine.

In a game state that is not a predetermined game state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the special ball-entering means. Although it is high, there is a possibility that the player's awareness of the fact that the opportunity ball entry means is in a state where it is possible to enter a ball is low because the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means in a predetermined game state. In this case, according to the feature J6, the acquisition corresponding notification is executed on the condition that the game ball has entered the acquisition corresponding ball entering means in a predetermined gaming state, so that the opportunity ball entering means is in the ball entering possible state. It is possible to direct the player's awareness to what will happen. In addition, in a game state other than a predetermined game state where it is highly likely that the player is conscious of the opportunity ball entry means being in a state where it is possible to enter a ball, the acquisition correspondence notification is not executed. It is possible to prevent the execution of the correspondence notification from being troublesome for the player.

Feature J7. means for acquiring special opportunity information based on the game ball entering the special ball entering means, and acquiring the special opportunity information based on the game ball entering the acquisition corresponding ball entering means; ,
The opportunity ball entry means is configured to enter the ball entry possible state based on the acquisition of the special opportunity information,
Said notification execution means, on the condition that said special opportunity information is acquired by a game ball entering said acquisition corresponding entering ball means in a situation where said special opportunity information is not acquired, said acquisition corresponding notification is The gaming machine according to feature J5 or J6, characterized in that it is executed.

According to the characteristic J7, it is possible to execute the notification corresponding to the acquisition in a situation where the player is less aware of the fact that the opportunity ball-entering means is in the enterable state.

Feature J8. Characteristic J1 characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the acquisition corresponding ball entry means are provided in a region where the game ball flows down when the shooting operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of J7.

According to feature J8, by continuing the shooting operation in a predetermined manner, the game ball enters the variable ball entering means, the game ball enters the special ball entering means, and the game ball enters the acquisition corresponding ball entering means. It becomes possible to aim at the entering ball of a game ball.

Feature J9. The opportunity ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball is more likely to reach the opportunity ball entry means when the shooting operation is performed in a specific mode than when the shooting operation is performed in the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature J8, characterized in that:

According to the feature J9, when the trigger ball-entering means is in a ball-enterable state in a predetermined game state, the game ball can be entered into the trigger-ball-entering means by performing a shooting operation in a specific mode. It is possible to make it easier to occur.

For the configuration of features J1 to J9, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group F, the feature group G, the feature group H, the feature group I, and the feature group J, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which profits are given to the player by shifting the game state to a special control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on a game ball entering a ball entering section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special control state is performed. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special control state based on a game ball entering a part. Then, when shifting to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Provided in a game area (game area PA) where game balls flow down, a first state in which game balls can enter or are easy to enter and a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter a first variable ball entry means (first special electric winning device 291) provided to be switchable between the second state and each;
A first state provided downstream of the first variable ball entry means, in which a game ball can be entered or easily entered, and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter. A second variable ball entry means (second special electric winning device 292) provided switchably to each of
Unit control means (main side CPU 63 in FIG. 85 (a) and the function of executing the closing setting process for the special electric train shown in FIG. 85(b));
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K1, a game ball that fails to enter the first variable ball entering means that is in the first state in the unit control state can enter the second variable ball entering means that is in the first state. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means in the unit control state.

Feature K2. A means for shifting the game state to a special control state (opening and closing execution mode) in which the unit control state is executed multiple times (function for executing special figure determination processing in main side CPU 63),
When the unit control state of one execution time ends, the game ball that starts flowing down from the position of the first variable ball entering means toward the second variable ball entering means is the unit control state of the next execution time. The gaming machine according to the feature K1, characterized in that the ball is entered in the second variable ball entering means in the first state.

According to the characteristic K2, the game ball that could not enter the first variable ball entering means despite reaching the position of the first variable ball entering means at the timing when the unit control state ends The ball is entered into the second variable entering means in the unit control state of the next execution. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls that do not enter the variable ball-entering means in spite of the shooting operation aimed at entering the game ball into the variable ball-entering means in the special control state.

Feature K3. The unit control means controls both the first variable ball-entering means and the second variable ball-entering means to be in the first state when the unit control state is started. The gaming machine described in K1 or K2.

According to feature K3, both the first variable ball-entering means and the second variable ball-entering means are controlled to be in the first state when the unit control state is started. It is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with a configuration in which the timing to enter the first state is individually set. In addition, a game ball that has failed to enter the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one execution time can enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution time.

Feature K4. The unit control means is such that when the unit control state is started, both the first variable ball-entering means and the second variable ball-entering means are in the first state, and when the unit control state ends, the The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to be in the second state.

According to feature K4, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling each variable ball entry means in the unit control state. In addition, according to this configuration, while it is basically the first variable ball entering means that is the target of game ball entry in the unit control state, the first variable ball entering means is entered in the unit control state of one execution time. The leaked game ball can enter the second variable ball entering means in the unit control state of the next execution.

Feature K5. A means for shifting the game state to a special control state in which the unit control state is executed multiple times (a function of executing a special figure finalizing process in the main side CPU 63),
In the special control state, the period from the end of the unit control state of one execution time to the start of the unit control state of the next execution time is from the position of the first variable ball entering means to the second A gaming machine according to feature K3 or K4, characterized in that the period is shorter than the period required for the game ball to reach the position of the variable ball entering means.

According to the feature K5, a game ball that has failed to enter the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one execution time can enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution time. becomes. In addition, it is possible to realize a configuration for making it difficult for such ball-entering leakage to occur by adjusting the positional relationship between the first variable ball-entering means and the second variable ball-entering means.

Feature K6. The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are configured so that a game ball flowing down a predetermined game area can be entered,
When the first variable ball entering means is in the first state, the game ball flowing down the predetermined game area is guided to the ball entering portion of the first variable ball entering means. , characterized in that it has a first displacement portion (the guide plate portion 214 of the first special electric winning device 291) that prevents the inflow of game balls toward the second variable ball entry means. The game machine described.

According to the feature K6, when the first variable ball-entering means is in the first state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from leaking into the first variable ball-entering means. In addition, with the configuration of the feature K5, even if a ball is not entered into the first variable ball entry means at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution time, the game ball is transferred to the second variable ball entry means. It is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a ball to leak into the variable ball-entering means in the special control state.

Feature K7. Said second variable ball entering means, when said second variable ball entering means is in said first state, is a game ball that flows down said predetermined game area and flows into the downstream side of said first variable ball entering means. A second displacement part (second special electric winning device 292 The gaming machine according to feature K6, characterized in that it has a guide plate portion 214).

According to the characteristic K7, even if a ball does not enter the first variable ball entering means at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution, the game ball enters the second variable ball entering means. It will happen.

Feature K8. A blocking state provided on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means and upstream of the second variable ball entry means to block the further inflow of the game ball flowing down from the upstream side to the downstream side. , and a non-blocking state that does not block the further inflow of the game ball to the downstream side, and blocking means (flow blocking member 303) provided so as to be switchable respectively. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature K8, even if a ball leak into the first variable ball entering means occurs, the blocking means can block the inflow of the leaked game ball to the downstream side. By switching the blocking means from the blocking state to the non-blocking state under the condition that the second variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game balls blocked from flowing downstream by the blocking state are released. It is possible to make the ball enter the second variable ball entering means.

Feature K9. The blocking means enters the blocking state at a timing before the timing at which the first variable ball-entering means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the second variable ball-entering means switches from the second state to the second state. blocking control means (a function of executing flow-down blocking control processing in the main CPU 63) that causes the blocking means to enter the non-blocking state at a timing later than the timing at which the state is switched to the first state; The gaming machine according to feature K8, characterized in that

According to feature K9, since the blocking means is in the blocking state at a timing prior to the timing at which the first variable ball-entering means is switched from the first state to the second state, the first variable ball-entering means is in the first state. At the timing of switching from the first state to the second state, it becomes possible for the blocking means to block further inflow of game balls that have entered and leaked into the first variable ball entry means to the downstream side. Then, the game ball blocked by the blocking means enters the non-blocking state at a timing later than the timing at which the second variable ball-entering means is switched from the second state to the first state. The ball will enter the ball entering means. Therefore, it becomes possible for the preventing means to prevent a ball from leaking into the variable ball entering means.

For the configuration of features K1 to K9, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group K, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which profits are given to the player by shifting the game state to a special control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on a game ball entering a ball entering section provided in the game area, and a transition to a special control state is performed. A configuration is known in which a transition is made to a special control state based on a game ball entering a part. Then, when shifting to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to make the execution mode of the special control state suitable in the gaming machines such as the above examples, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 32... Special electric prize-winning device, 33... 1st operation opening, 34... 2nd operation opening, 35... Through gate, 45b... Entrance part, 63... Main side CPU, 82... Display control device, 214... Induction Board portion 241 Guide nail group 251 First special ball entrance 252 Second special ball entrance 261 First special electric prize winning device 262 Second special electric prize winning device 263 First through gate 264...Second through gate 265...First major prize opening 266...Second major prize opening 267...First guide nail group 268...Second guide nail group 271...First guide plate 281...Second Induction plate 291 First special electric prize winning device 292 Second special electric prize winning device 303 Flow blocking member 311 Gate for emergency 312 Limit nail PA Play area.

Claims (1)

a shooting operation means operated to shoot a game ball;
Predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball;
a game value giving means for executing a process for giving a game value to a game;
a process executing means electrically connected to the game value imparting means for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising payout control means electrically connected to the game value imparting means and driving and controlling the payout means,
The game value imparting means is
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information, which is information used in the processing for imparting the game value and is referred to for detection by the predetermined detection means;
After the predetermined supply of electric power to the game machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined process for advancing the game is started, the reference data stored in the first reference information storage means a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to information to the processing executing means;
a second transmission means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on ball entry information, which is information acquired based on detection by the predetermined detection means, to the process execution means;
means for waiting the progress of processing until a predetermined period of time elapses after a predetermined supply of power to the game machine is started;
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, erase processing of information in a predetermined storage area is performed after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine is started and before execution of the predetermined processing is started. means to carry out
with
The processing execution means is
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value imparting means;
execution means for executing the predetermined processing based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage unit for storing processing result information, which is information about a processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution unit;
means for erasing the processing result information stored in the processing result information storage means when a prescribed erasing trigger occurs based on the execution of a prescribed erasing operation;
with
The reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means is not transmitted to the payout control means,
The payout control means is
grasping means for grasping the number of game balls to be paid out based on the payout instruction signal transmitted from the game value imparting means based on the result of the game;
means for driving and controlling said payout means so that the number of game balls grasped by said grasping means is paid out;
with
The game value imparting means is main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The processing execution means is a production control means for controlling the execution of production,
The predetermined process is a process corresponding to the state of the gaming machine and is different from the payout of game balls ,
The first transmitting means transmits the reference information signal to the process executing means after the predetermined period has elapsed and after the erasing process is executed if the predetermined trigger has occurred. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to transmit .

Images